ME12 013 R12a

Vertical machining center
MB-V Series
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
(12th Edition)
Pub No. 6175-E-R11 (ME12-013-R12) Oct. 2017
MB-46V(E)
MB-56V
MB-56V-AW
MB-66V
MF-46V
MU-400V II
6175-E P-(i)
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Thank you very much for your purchase of this machine.
This instruction manual contains information on correct machine operation that is essential for maximizing
performance and for maintaining machine precision. It also covers essential information on machine
inspection and maintenance as well as safety precautions.
Please read it carefully and follow the instructions contained.
Please also refer to the [Separate volume technical sheet].
For information related to the Control Apparatus, please see the separately provided [Control Apparatus
Related Manual].
Note
In this manual, all dimensions in the images are in "mm" unless otherwise specified.
6175-E P-(i)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 SAFETY GUIDE ....................................................................................1
1-1. General advice .................................................................................................................. 1
1-2. Basic security advice ......................................................................................................... 1
1-2-1. Warning signals and symbols.............................................................................. 1
1-2-2. Electric system .................................................................................................... 4
1-2-3. Strong magnetic fields......................................................................................... 4
1-2-4. Pneumatic, hydraulic and coolant system ........................................................... 5
1-2-5. Laser radiation..................................................................................................... 6
1-3. Personal security ............................................................................................................... 7
1-4. Intended use ...................................................................................................................... 7
1-5. Improper use ..................................................................................................................... 8
1-6. What to do in case of emergency ...................................................................................... 9
1-6-1. Emergency stop .................................................................................................. 9
1-6-2. Fire protection ................................................................................................... 10
1-7. General advice for the user ............................................................................................. 10
1-7-1. Prerequisites for operating the machine............................................................ 10
1-7-2. Caution plates ................................................................................................... 10
1-7-3. Structural alterations to machines and systems................................................ 11
1-7-4. Replacement parts ............................................................................................ 11
1-7-5. Requirements for operators and maintenance staff .......................................... 12
1-7-6. Special applications........................................................................................... 13
1-7-7. Safety at the workplace ..................................................................................... 13
1-8. Tools/Tool change ........................................................................................................... 14
SECTION 2 OUTLINE .............................................................................................15

2-1. Features of this machine ................................................................................................. 15
2-1-1. Features of machine components ..................................................................... 17
2-1-2. Features of machine functions .......................................................................... 20
2-2. Parts of the machine........................................................................................................ 22
2-2-1. Main unit............................................................................................................ 22
2-3. Machining range and workpiece dimensions................................................................... 28
2-3-1. Machining range................................................................................................ 28
2-3-2. Dimensions inside full-enclosure shielding........................................................ 35
2-3-3. Loading range (MF-46VA/46VB only) ............................................................... 44
2-3-4. Maximum workpiece swing diameter / height (MU-400V II only) ...................... 46
2-3-5. Precautions related to workpieces and tools..................................................... 47
2-4. Safety functions ............................................................................................................... 48
2-4-1. Interlock and door lock functions....................................................................... 48
2-4-2. Door lock switch positions and types ................................................................ 48
2-4-3. Door lock releasing in emergency ..................................................................... 49
6175-E P-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3 TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION....................................................56

3-1. About safety..................................................................................................................... 56
3-2. Transporting the machine ................................................................................................ 57
3-2-1. Lifting the machine ............................................................................................ 57
3-2-2. Lifting the coolant tank (except MB-56V-AW) ................................................... 72
3-2-3. Cautions for truck transportation ....................................................................... 76
3-2-4. When removing the Z-axis motor ...................................................................... 76
3-3. Preparation before delivery ............................................................................................. 77
3-3-1. About fixtures .................................................................................................... 77
3-4. Machine installation ......................................................................................................... 78
3-4-1. Temporary leveling............................................................................................ 78
3-4-2. Assembling the units and parts shipped separately and preparing for
operation ........................................................................................................... 78
3-4-3. Leveling the machine (MNTKEY0310) .............................................................. 79
SECTION 4 PREPARATION FOR OPERATION.....................................................85

4-1. Supplying lubricating oil/hydraulic oil ............................................................................... 85
4-1-1. Lubrication oil charts ......................................................................................... 86
4-1-2. Symbols............................................................................................................. 95
4-2. Lubrication and inspection method .................................................................................. 96
4-2-1. Supplying oil for the hydraulic unit (MF-46V, MB-56V-AW, MU-400V
II only) (MNTKEY0520) ..................................................................................... 96
4-2-2. Supplying oil for the APC hydraulic unit (MB-46V(E)/56V/66V only)
(MNTKEY0450) ............................................................................................... 102
4-2-3. Supplying oil for the oil-air lubrication unit (MNTKEY0540) ............................ 104
4-2-4. Supplying oil for the spindlehead cooling unit (MNTKEY0511)....................... 105
4-2-5. Supplying oil for the hydraulic unit for bearing pretension
(MNTKEY0523) ............................................................................................... 107
4-2-6. Greasing ball screws, linear guide, and ATC (magazine) (except MB-
66V) (MNTKEY0421) ...................................................................................... 109
4-2-7. Adding oil to the ATC cam box (MNTKEY0410) ............................................. 126
4-2-8. Supplying oil for the tool unclamp package (MNTKEY0240) .......................... 127
4-2-9. Supplying oil for the A- and C-axes tables (MU-400V II only)
(MNTKEY0350) ............................................................................................... 129
4-2-10. Adding oil to the lubricator (optional)............................................................... 131
4-3. Maintenance and inspection of HSK tool clamping unit (optional)................................. 132
4-3-1. Greasing the clamping unit (MNTKEY0210) ................................................... 132
4-3-2. Inspecting the packing used in the clamping unit (MNTKEY0211) ................. 134
4-4. Coolant .......................................................................................................................... 136
4-4-1. Coolant tank .................................................................................................... 136
4-4-2. Classification of (Water-soluble) coolant performance.................................... 138
4-5. Chip pan (except MB-56V-AW) ..................................................................................... 140
4-5-1. Chip pan configuration .................................................................................... 140
4-6. Coolant unit (drum filter type chip conveyor system) (optional for MF-46V).................. 142
6175-E P-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-6-1. Specifications .................................................................................................. 142

4-7. Oil hole holder ............................................................................................................... 144
4-7-1. Specifications .................................................................................................. 144
SECTION 5 OPERATION......................................................................................148
5-1. Operation panels ........................................................................................................... 148
5-2. Before starting operation ............................................................................................... 151
5-2-1. General checks ............................................................................................... 151
5-2-2. Before turning on the power ............................................................................ 151
5-2-3. Precautions during manual operation and continuous operation .................... 152
5-2-4. Spindle precautions......................................................................................... 153
5-2-5. Tool precautions.............................................................................................. 153
5-2-6. Things to remember during set-up and configuration...................................... 154
5-2-7. Workpiece loading and unloading ................................................................... 154
5-2-8. Dry and minimum quantity machining (MQL) .................................................. 155
5-2-9. When a problem occurs .................................................................................. 156
5-3. Manual operation, preparatory operation ...................................................................... 157
5-3-1. Power ON/OFF................................................................................................ 157
5-3-2. Emergency stop .............................................................................................. 160
5-3-3. Hand turning the spindle (spindle running idle) ............................................... 161
5-3-4. Spindle indexing (position stopping of the spindle) ......................................... 162
5-3-5. Clamping and unclamping the tool in spindle.................................................. 164
5-3-6. Reference information on [MOLYKOTE 321] .................................................. 166
5-4. When starting the machine ............................................................................................ 169
5-5. Spindle speed selection................................................................................................. 170
5-5-1. Spindle speed selection .................................................................................. 170
5-5-2. Spindle speed - spindle power/torque diagrams ............................................. 173
5-6. Spindle CW, CCW, STOP ............................................................................................. 180
5-6-1. Operating conditions ....................................................................................... 180
5-6-2. Operating method............................................................................................ 180
5-7. Feeding the X-, Y-, Z-, A-, and C-axes .......................................................................... 182
5-7-2. Rapid feed operation procedure...................................................................... 183
5-7-3. Running-in operations ..................................................................................... 184
5-7-4. Manual feed operation..................................................................................... 184
5-7-5. Automatic feed operation ................................................................................ 185
5-8. Manual pulse feed ......................................................................................................... 186
5-9. Coolant unit ................................................................................................................... 190
5-9-1. Coolant nozzle................................................................................................. 190
5-9-2. Coolant operation ............................................................................................ 192
5-10. Chip conveyor................................................................................................................ 194
6175-E P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5-10-1. Chip conveyor (Chip flushing system)............................................................. 194

5-10-2. Chip conveyor (coil screw type) (optional) (except MB-56V-AW) ................... 196
5-11. Panel light ...................................................................................................................... 197
5-11-1. Panel light location .......................................................................................... 198
5-12. Oil mist coolant supply system (with air blow circuit) (optional)..................................... 201
5-13. Nozzle chip air blower ................................................................................................... 203
5-14. Operation end lamp, buzzer and auto power shutoff lamp ............................................ 204
5-14-1. Display lamp location ...................................................................................... 205
SECTION 6 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS ....................207

6-1. General information ....................................................................................................... 208
6-2. Cleaning agents............................................................................................................. 208
6-3. Periodical inspection schedule ...................................................................................... 209
6-3-1. Periodical inspection schedule ........................................................................ 209
6-3-2. Precautions for cleaning the safety window .................................................... 215
6-4. Adjustment of hydraulic unit .......................................................................................... 216
6-4-1. Source pressure adjustment and pressure indication (MB-46V(E)/
56V/66V/56V-AW, MF-46V, MU-400V II) ........................................................ 216
6-5. Adjusting air equipment ................................................................................................. 218
6-5-1. Adjusting air equipment (MNTKEY0531) ........................................................ 218
6-6. Adjusting air equipment for the Abso-Scale system (optional) (MNTKEY0530).............. 223
6-7. Precautions regarding spindle rotation (8,000 min-1/15,000 min-1/20,000 min-1/
25,000 min-1/35,000 min-1 (No.40), 6,000 min-1/12,000 min-1 (No.50)) .......................... 225
6-7-1. Spindle lubrication (oil-air)............................................................................... 225
6-7-2. Lubricating oil and air supply conditions.......................................................... 226
6-7-3. Lubrication alarms and reset method .............................................................. 227
6-7-4. Spindle bearing life.......................................................................................... 228
6-7-5. Spindle bearing life counter function ............................................................... 229
6-7-6. Replacement of spindle unit ............................................................................ 230
6-7-7. About tools (25,000 min-1/35,000 min-1 spindle only) ...................................... 230
6-7-8. Other cautions on the spindle (25,000 min-1/35,000 min-1 spindle only)
.............. 230
6-8. Cleaning the air filter of the spindlehead cooling unit (cooler) (MNTKEY0510).............. 231
6-8-1. Spindlehead cooling unit configuration............................................................ 231
6-9. Cleaning the air filter on the thermal deviation suppression (TAS-C) unit
(optional)........................................................................................................................ 233
6-9-1. Cleaning the air filter on the thermal deviation suppression (TAS-C)
unit (optional) (MNTKEY0840) ........................................................................ 233
6-10. Replacing and adjusting the APC timing belt (MF-46V only)......................................... 235
6-10-1. Precautions when replacing the timing belt..................................................... 235
6-10-2. Replacing the timing belt for Z-axis drive ........................................................ 236
6-10-3. Adjusting timing belt tension (MNTKEY0455) ................................................. 237
6-10-4. Precautions when using timing belt................................................................. 239
6-10-5. Timing belt and pulley: causes of premature damage and their
countermeasures............................................................................................. 243
6175-E P-(v)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6-10-6. Using the Bando tension meter ....................................................................... 244

6-11. Replacing the onboard light ........................................................................................... 248
6-11-1. Replacing the fluorescent light (MNTKEY0835).............................................. 248
6-11-2. Replacing the LED light (MNTKEY0834) ........................................................ 252
6-12. Cleaning the coolant unit (MNTKEY0810)..................................................................... 253
6-12-1. Cleaning .......................................................................................................... 253
6-13. Procured parts ............................................................................................................... 255
6-14. Safety window glass for operation door (MNTKEY0830) .............................................. 255
6-14-1. Replacement interval....................................................................................... 255
6-14-2. Replacement of safety window glass for operation door................................. 256
6-15. Inspecting the bellows cover (MNTKEY0831) ............................................................... 258
6-16. Inspecting the telescopic cover (except MF-46V) (MNTKEY0832) ............................... 259
SECTION 7 ATC....................................................................................................260
7-1. ATC safety precautions ................................................................................................. 260
7-2. ATC magazine door interlock ........................................................................................ 261
7-3. ATC tool dimensions ..................................................................................................... 262
7-3-1. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.40)................................................. 262
7-3-2. Maximum tool size with no adjacent tools (No.40) .......................................... 266
7-3-3. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.50)................................................. 269
7-3-4. Maximum tool size with no adjacent tools (No.50) .......................................... 273
7-3-5. Maximum tool mass moment .......................................................................... 276
7-3-6. ATC workpiece interference diagram (No.40) ................................................. 278
7-3-7. ATC workpiece interference diagram (No.50) ................................................. 284
7-3-8. ATC magazine interference diagram............................................................... 289
7-4. Preparing the ATC ......................................................................................................... 293
7-4-1. Preparing ATC tools ........................................................................................ 293
7-4-2. Setting tools into the ATC magazine ............................................................... 297
7-4-3. Manual magazine indexing operation.............................................................. 298
7-5. Manual ATC operation................................................................................................... 300
7-5-1. One step advance and one step return ........................................................... 300
7-5-2. One cycle start and return cycle start.............................................................. 302
7-5-3. Precautions for manual ATC operation ........................................................... 302
7-5-4. Memory-random ATC specification ................................................................. 303
7-6. ATC continuous operation ............................................................................................. 310
7-6-1. Initial conditions for continuous ATC operation ............................................... 310
7-6-2. ATC operation sequence................................................................................. 311
7-6-3. ATC operation sequence diagram................................................................... 317
7-7. Adjusting ATC................................................................................................................ 319
SECTION 8 APC ...................................................................................................320

8-1. Overview of the two-pallet rotary-shuttle APC (MF-46V standard specification)
.............. 320
8-1-1. Construction .................................................................................................... 320
6175-E P-(vi)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8-1-2. Specifications .................................................................................................. 320

8-1-3. Limitation on workpiece center of gravity ........................................................ 321
8-2. Operating the two-pallet rotary APC .............................................................................. 322
8-2-1. Safety precautions for APC operation ............................................................. 322
8-2-2. Conditions for automatic pallet changing operation ........................................ 322
8-3. Two-pallet rotary APC operation sequence ................................................................... 324
8-3-1. Pallet changing operation sequence ............................................................... 324
8-3-2. APC operation sequence diagram .................................................................. 325
8-4. Continuous operation of the two-pallet rotary APC ....................................................... 327
8-4-1. Initial conditions for continuous APC operation............................................... 327
8-5. Manually operating the two-pallet rotary type APC........................................................ 329
8-5-1. Safety precautions for manual APC operation ................................................ 329
8-6. Overview of the two-pallet parallel APC (For MB-46V(E)/56V/66V (optional)) .............. 332
8-6-1. Construction .................................................................................................... 332
8-6-2. Specifications .................................................................................................. 332
8-6-3. Safety precautions........................................................................................... 333
8-6-4. APC operation panel ....................................................................................... 333
8-7. Two-pallet parallel APC operation sequence ................................................................ 334
8-7-1. Pallet changing operation sequence ............................................................... 334
8-7-2. APC operation sequence diagram .................................................................. 337
8-8. Continuous operation of the two-pallet parallel APC ..................................................... 346
8-8-1. Initial conditions for continuous APC operation............................................... 346
8-8-2. Emergency stop of APC continuous operation................................................ 347
8-9. Manual operation of the two-pallet parallel APC ........................................................... 348
8-9-1. Safety precautions for manual APC operation ................................................ 348
8-9-2. Other precautions related to APC (MNTKEY0460) ......................................... 348
SECTION 9 OPTIONS ..........................................................................................352

9-1. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [1.5 MPa (217.7 psi)] (separate tank type)
.............. 352
9-1-1. Outline ............................................................................................................. 352
9-1-2. Circuit diagram of through-spindle coolant system ......................................... 354
9-1-3. Specifications .................................................................................................. 355
9-1-4. Preparation for operation................................................................................. 357
9-1-5. Maintenance and regular inspection (MNTKEY0811) ..................................... 358
9-2. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [7.0 MPa (1,015.7 psi)] (separate tank
type)............................................................................................................................... 361
9-2-1. Outline ............................................................................................................. 361
9-2-3. Specifications .................................................................................................. 365
6175-E P-(vii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

9-2-5. Maintenance and regular inspection ............................................................... 368
9-3. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [1.5 MPa (217.7 psi)] (integrated into
coolant tank type) (MF-46V only) .................................................................................. 370
9-3-1. Outline ............................................................................................................. 370
9-3-3. Specifications .................................................................................................. 372
9-4. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [7.0 MPa (1,015.7 psi)] (integrated into
coolant tank type) (MF-46V only) .................................................................................. 375
9-4-1. Outline ............................................................................................................. 375
9-4-3. Specifications .................................................................................................. 377
9-4-6. Procedure to change through pin in the pulling shaft (MNTKEY0220)
.............. 380
SECTION 10 PRESERVATION ...............................................................................391

10-1. Preservation during transportation and storage ............................................................ 391
10-2. Cleaning before preservation ........................................................................................ 391
10-3. Truck transportation and warehouse storage ................................................................ 391
10-4. Removing preservation.................................................................................................. 391
10-5. Machine transportation .................................................................................................. 391
SECTION 11 DISPOSAL OF THE MACHINE.........................................................392

11-1. Material groups .............................................................................................................. 392
11-2. Operating materials ....................................................................................................... 392
11-3. Disposal of electronic components ................................................................................ 392
11-4. Disposal of the packaging ............................................................................................. 392
6175-E P-1
SECTION 1 SAFETY GUIDE
1-1. General advice

Your personal safety is important!
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine
itself from hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively
on these safety devices. They must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented
below to ensure accident-free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards
which OKUMA can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.
Every person responsible for installing, operating, maintaining, repairing and inspecting the
machine must have read and understood the following safety regulations.
The machine may only be operated by trained and authorized personnel.
Responsibilities for operating, servicing and maintenance of the machine must be clearly laid down
and adhered to.
Note
The content will be updated according to the safety regulations when required and without notice.
1-2. Basic security advice
1-2-1. Warning signals and symbols

The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of
particular importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.
6175-E P-2
Danger due to suspended loads

This symbol warns of lifted or suspended loads.
Never step under lifted or suspended loads.
Non-observance of these instructions could result in death or
serious injury.
Danger due to toppling of the machine

This symbol warns of machines or machine parts that may topple
over.
Always observe the specifications related to load support and load
carrying devices.
serious injury.
Danger of being crushed
This symbol warns of risks of hands and upper limbs being
crushed.
serious injury.
Danger of slipping
This symbol warns of a danger of slipping in the area of use and
the work area of the machine.
serious injury.
Danger of being cut

This symbol warns of a danger of being cut due to sharp edges
and cutting edges of tools.
serious injury.
Danger due to laser beams

This symbol warns of a danger due to laser beams.
serious injury.
Danger due to electrical voltage

This symbol warns of a danger due to electrical voltage.
serious injury.
Risk of explosion
This symbol warns of a risk of explosion.
serious injury.
Fire hazard
This symbol indicates situations which may lead to a fire. Keep
open flames and heat sources away and prevent the formation of
sparks!
serious injury.
6175-E P-3
Danger due to strong magnetic fields

Danger of the effect of magnetic forces on ferromagnetic objects!
Do not allow these objects to enter the close range of magnets!
serious injury.
Danger due to crushing zone

This symbol warns of an area in which body parts may be crushed
and persons may be caught.
serious injury.
Danger due to protruding tools

This symbol warns of protruding tools with sharp edges and
cutting edges.
serious injury.
Personal protective equipment

These symbols instruct you to use personal protective equipment
when performing certain work on the machine. Depending on the
situation, all persons in the operation area of the machine must
wear the protective clothing mentioned below.
serious injury.
No access for persons with pacemakers

Access is prohibited to persons with cardiac pacemakers.
Electromagnetic or magnetic fields may cause malfunctions in
these devices.
No access for persons with metallic implants

Access is prohibited to persons with metallic implants.
Electromagnetic or magnetic fields may cause metallic implants to
be heated and, therefore, lead to considerable body injuries.
No open flames or heat sources

Open flames or heat sources are forbidden. Depending on the
type of production, there may be highly inflammable media or
substances in the area around the machine.
Do not extinguish with water

Seats of fire must not be extinguished with water.
6175-E P-4
1-2-2. Electric system

Danger due to electrical voltage
Incorrect handling or failure to follow these instructions may result
in electric shock, causing serious injury or death.
Do not operate the machine with the switch cabinet doors,
terminal boxes, or control panels open.
The electrical equipment of the machine must be regularly
checked. Immediately rectify any defects, such as loose
connections or damaged cables.
The connection of the machine to the electrical mains supply and
work on the electrical equipment and in the switch cabinet may be
performed only by qualified staff. When performing this work, the
regulations and guidelines for the installation and operation of
electrical systems applicable at the place of installation must be
observed.
The electric system remains active even after the main switch
is turned off.
1-2-3. Strong magnetic fields

Danger due to powerful magnets
Some products contain powerful magnets, which could be
dangerous if exposed by disassembling the products.
Products containing powerful magnets are provided with a caution
plate to indicate where such magnets are used.
(1) Get assistance from OKUMA for disassembling or repairing
the powerful magnet housing unit.
 Strong magnetic force is exposed during and after
disassembling these units, causing extreme danger.
 Disassembling work requires special knowledge and jigs.
(2) Danger due to powerful magnets
The following are examples of possible damage caused by
being close to powerful magnets.
 Medical electronic instruments such as pacemakers
could malfunction, resulting in serious bodily injury or
loss of life.
 Magnetic metal devices implanted in the body (e.g.
artificial eyes, brain artery clips) may be attracted by the
powerful magnetic force, causing life threatening danger.
 Metal clothing accessories may be attracted by the
powerful magnetic force, resulting in body injury.
 Tools or parts may be attracted by the powerful magnetic
force, resulting in body injury.
 Precision equipment could malfunction if it is placed near
the machine.
 Data loss may be caused if any electromagnetic media is
placed near the machine.
(3) Contact OKUMA when disassembling a magnet housing unit
is necessary to dispose of the machine.
6175-E P-5
1-2-4. Pneumatic, hydraulic and coolant system

Work on the hydraulic, pneumatic or coolant system may be
performed only by qualified staff in compliance with the guidelines
and regulations applicable at the place of installation.
The system must be depressurised before disconnecting a pipe or
disassembling a control or driving unit. Lower or secure the loads,
switch off the pumps, and relieve the pressure accumulators. Also
with machines with automatic pressure relief, check on the
pressure gauge whether the system is really depressurised!
Pressure accumulators are equipped with safety valves. The
safety valves are leaded, and their setting fixed. Changing the
setting of these valves can be life-threatening. Do not change the
setting of these valves!
Checking and maintenance of pressure accumulators must be
performed according to national regulations.
If you notice damage to pressure hoses, pressure pipes and screw
fittings (e.g. chafe marks or leaks), the machine must be
immediately switched off even if there are only minor defects and
may be put into operation again only after the defects have been
eliminated.
There is danger of injuries, explosion and fire due to the discharge
of media under high pressure.
There is danger of injuries, explosion and fire due to the discharge
of hydraulic fluid under high pressure. Therefore, leaks and
damage to the piping must be immediately repaired.
Check at regular intervals whether pressure hoses, pressure pipes
and screw fittings are intact and immediately replace them even if
they are only slightly damaged.
Regularly replace the pressure hoses according to the applicable
regulations. Observe instructions provided by OKUMA.
Hydraulic and compressed air pipes should be laid and installed
by a specialist.
Do not mix up the connections! Fittings and the length and quality
of the hoses must meet the requirements.
Pipes, hoses and machine parts may be damaged if the hydraulic
system is not vented when it is put into operation again after repair
or after being moved to a different location.
Penetration of oil into the ground must be prevented under all
circumstances.
Cooling lubricants which attack plastics, rubber or paint, must not
be used. These may damage hoses (hydraulic, pneumatic),
cables and seals.
Cooling lubricants may contain harmful substances.
Cooling lubricants pose an environmental hazard. Make sure they
are disposed of properly.
6175-E P-6
1-2-5. Laser radiation

Observe the warnings and the instructions in the operation manual
of the device manufacturer!
Danger due to laser beam
Danger of severe eye and skin injuries due to invisible or visible
laser beams!
Do not look into the laser beam directly or with optical devices!
Wear suitable protective goggles depending on the laser intensity!
Do not allow parts of the body to be exposed to radiation.
6175-E P-7
1-3. Personal security

Wear tight-fitting clothing in order to avoid accidents.
In particular, avoid wearing ties, scarves, rings, and necklaces. There is danger of getting caught in
the machine's moving parts. If you have long hair, bundle your hair by wearing a hat or other head
wear.
Depending on the situation, all persons in the machine working area must wear the following
protective clothing:
Protective goggles
Break proof protective goggles with side shield must be worn
during all turning and milling work. Flying metallic chips may cause
severe eye injuries or loss of eyesight.
Suitable special goggles must be worn when performing any kind
of work within the danger zone of active laser devices.
Safety shoes
Safety shoes with steel toe caps must be worn for protection
against being crushed.
Safety gloves
Machining results in high temperatures and sharp edges on the
workpiece. Do not touch workpieces, tools or chips with bare
hands! Gloves may not be worn if there is danger of them getting
caught.
Hearing protection
Wear hearing protection if the noise emission at the machine
location exceeds the permissible level. Do not remove any noise
insulation equipment.
Safety helmet
A safety helmet must be worn when performing overhead
assembly and disassembly work, working with the crane, or if
there is a risk of head injuries, particularly due to falling tools or
workpieces.
1-4. Intended use

This machine can be used primarily for turning, milling, drilling, tapping, centering, hob cutting, and
boring of metallic materials.
The performance details of the machine are specified in the Technical Data in the operating
instructions.
The machine is designed for machining at ambient temperatures between 10 °C (50 °F) and 40 °C
(104 °F). Ambient temperatures under 10 °C (50 °F) and over 40 °C (104 °F) can lead to
malfunctions in individual components.
Any other use or any use beyond this scope is considered improper use. OKUMA shall not be
responsible for any damages resulting from such use. The customer shall be responsible for all
associated risk.
Proper use also means that the operating instructions must be observed and the prescribed
inspection and maintenance intervals must be adhered to.
6175-E P-8
1-5. Improper use

The machine is not designed for:
 machining any flammable material
 machining composite (fiber) and resin materials
 machining carbon material
 machining magnesium material
 Use of oil-based coolants
Improper use includes, among other things, using the machine in:
 explosive environment
 residential areas
 water protection areas
If the machine is not used according to its intended purpose or not used properly, this may lead to:
 danger of life and limb
 damage to the machine
 damage to other property
Non-observance of this instruction may result in forfeiture of any liability and warranty.
6175-E P-9
1-6. What to do in case of emergency
1-6-1. Emergency stop

Press EMG. STOP button:
 if persons are in danger.
 if there is a danger of the machine or the workpiece being damaged.
Please check all EMG. STOP button positions (depending on machine model) before using the
machine.
Important
EMG. STOP button does not completely switch off the machine!
When the emergency stop function is triggered, the machine is brought to a standstill as quickly as
possible. Damage may occur to workpieces and tools.
Should a person get pinned in the machine, the machine will not be operated when the EMG. STOP
push button switch is on hold. In that case turn the EMG. STOP push button to the right to reset it
and press the CONTROL ON push button switch. If an alarm is displayed, reset the alarm by
pressing the RESET button. Then set the mode selection switch on the operation panel to the SET
mode from the PRODUCTION, SET and TEST mode options, and select MANUAL with the
operation mode key. Now free the person by reversing the machine using the pulse handle with the
ENABLE switch held down, while paying the attention to the axis direction.
Note) If there are no mode selection or ENABLE switches, the above underlined steps are not
necessary.
Emergency Measures in Door-close and Power-OFF State

When fire breaks out inside the machine while the door is closed and the power is OFF, open the
door using the door lock switch "release key" and extinguish the fire.
For door interlock switch positions, refer to [SECTION 2, 2-4-2. Door lock switch positions and
types].
6175-E P-10
1-6-2. Fire protection

Please follow general safety regulations for fire protection in your facility.
Take every measure so that you can extinguish the fire immediately by placing a fire extinguisher
near the machine and have an operator always watch the machining condition, or by installing an
auto extinguisher.
What to do if there is a fire
(1) Immediately leave the interior of the machine and close the protective doors.
(2) Switch off the machine:
 Press the EMG. STOP button.
 Shut off the main breaker in the control box.
1-7. General advice for the user
1-7-1. Prerequisites for operating the machine

Operate the machine only when it is in a safe condition. This particularly requires that the machine
should be cleaned and maintained. Changes in the machine that impair its safety must be rectified
without any delay.
Observe the time limits for periodic tests/inspections.
All existing safety devices must be regularly checked at the fixed inspections intervals.
Use only virus-free devices and data carriers on the machine.
This instruction manual must always be kept close to the machine working area and made available
to the operating and maintenance staff. In addition to this instruction manual, generally accepted
regulations as well as local and national regulations on accident prevention and environment
protection must be provided and their observance regularly checked.
Any necessary personal protective equipment must be provided by the operator. It is also the
operator's duty to take measures ensuring the proper use of all necessary protective equipment by
the staff.
When selecting operating oils, auxiliary oils or cleaning agents such as cooling lubricant, lubricant,
hydraulic oil, or detergents, abide by requirements on environmental preservation and disposal as
well as restrictions imposed on manufacturing sites concerning contained amounts of toxic
substances.
1-7-2. Caution plates

 The following caution plates are attached to the machine and related equipment. Carefully read
and follow the instructions inscribed on the plates.
 All safety and caution signs on the machine must be kept in a legible state and must never be
removed.
 Do not peel or damage the caution plates. If a plate is lost or becomes illegible, place an order
with OKUMA for a new plate by referring to the OKUMA part number written on the plate.
For information on Caution Plates, refer to the [Separate volume technical sheet].
6175-E P-11
1-7-3. Structural alterations to machines and systems

Specification of this machine in its original condition, is stated in the operation manual. Do not
modify or reassemble this machine. Do not modify or rebuild the machine and do not attach any
fittings to it without written consultation with the OKUMA local representative!
Non-observance of this instruction may result in forfeiture of any liability and warranty. The following
cases also are subject to the same treatment.
 Installation and setting of safety devices and valves.
 Welding on load-bearing parts of the machine. Electrical components can be damaged if

electric welding is carried out on the machine or to parts connected to it, even when the
machine is switched off. OKUMA accepts no liability for damage caused in this way.
 Changes in the cooling lubricant (e.g. type, mixing ratio).
As a basic principle, the safety of workers (operator and maintenance/repair personnel) must be
taken into consideration when making structural alterations. All rebuilding or attachment measures
must be tested and confirmed by authorities.
If the following structural alterations are performed, related documentation (applicable operation,
maintenance, or cleaning manuals, or other documents related to matters such as risk analyses,
declarations of conformity) must be revised by local OKUMA representatives.
 Replacing a component with the one with increased performance (e.g. motors, linear axes,
etc.).
 Replacing or using control units.
 Removing, attaching or modifying parts or system components (geometric form). This may lead
to another source of danger.
 Exchanging of bigger work holding systems, which are not covered by the specific regulation of
[Safety of machine tools].
1-7-4. Replacement parts

Spare parts must meet technical requirements specified by OKUMA.
All OKUMA specified replacement parts meet these requirements.
Use of replacement parts other than those specified by OKUMA may result in personal injury or
damage to the machine.
6175-E P-12
1-7-5. Requirements for operators and maintenance staff

Every person dealing with the setup, installation, test operation, operation and maintenance of the
machine must read and understand this instruction manual, particularly [SECTION 1 SAFETY
GUIDE], before starting work for the first time.
The machine may be operated and maintained only by persons who are specially trained for this
kind of work. This is especially important for the electrical, pneumatic, and hydraulic or coolant
related equipment of the machine.
After completion of installation work, a qualified staff or an authorized representative from OKUMA
will provide basic instructions to operators who will engage in the operation and maintenance of the
machine, on how to operate the machine.
The operator agrees to provide operation and maintenance training to new machine operators and
maintenance personnel at the equivalent level of detail and with full consideration across all safety
requirements.
Staff to be trained or instructed or staff undergoing general training may be allowed to work on the
machine only under constant supervision by an experienced person!
If more than one person works on the machine, clearly define the job responsibilities of each
individual and adhere to those job assignments.
With regard to safety, there must not be any ambiguity as to the responsibilities.
Persons with health restrictions must find out before working on the machine which additional
dangers the machine poses to them. This applies, for example, to persons with implants or a cardiac
pacemaker.
If there are any malfunctions or safety-relevant modifications in the machine, immediately stop the
machine and secure it. Inform the person in charge of the appropriate department about the
malfunction and have it rectified immediately!
Do not use any methods of operation which may compromise safety!
The moving unit and rotary unit are installed inside the cover. Turn off the main power and ensure
safety before removing the cover for cleaning, inspection or setup, or stepping inside the machine
movable range.
Before switching on or running the machine, make sure that nobody can be put at risk when the
machine starts and that there are no persons in the danger zone of the machine!
Do not switch off or remove suction and venting devices while the machine is running!
During machine operation, there may be no persons in the area around the pressure relief valves.
In the event of an explosion in the workplace, hot combustion gases may escape causing a hazard
to persons.
Do not make any program changes (software) in programmable control systems that may impair the
safety of the machine!
Mobile and Wireless telephones are not allowed.
Use of mobile phones, wireless telephones, wireless sets or any
other radio frequency devices in close proximity to the open
control box is prohibited. It can't be ruled out that they have an
interfering effect on the CNC control.
Ensure that all safety and danger signs are attached to the machine so they are clearly legible, and
adhere to the instructions on them.
Do not put anything in the working area. The machine could be seriously damaged.
Keep the operator station and the access points free from tools, auxiliary materials and other
objects. Ensure that the work place at and around the machine is clean and neatly organized.
The safety key to the machine control panel, electrical switch box, terminal box, setup unit (oil
pressure, air pressure), and other safety related equipment should be controlled by a person
specially trained and approved in the operation of such equipment.
Use only virus-free devices and data carriers on the machine.
Electrical limit switches, hydraulic solenoid valves and other control or actuating elements included
in the controlling process cannot be operated. Non-observance of this instruction may lead to
injuries to persons or damage to the machine.
6175-E P-13
1-7-6. Special applications

Special machining applications in combination with non-standardized machine equipment require
careful assessment inspection. Please check with an OKUMA representative for each individual
case.
Exceptional application cases are:
 machining magnesium material
 use of oil-based coolants
 machining composite (fiber) and resin materials
 machining carbon material
 machining any flammable material
When it is necessary to implement any one of the above exceptions, be sure to consult with an
OKUMA representative to obtain expert advice necessary for maintaining machine safety. The
OKUMA representatives are ready to offer a special kit for these exceptional requirements.
Non-observance of this instruction may result in forfeiture of any liability and warranty.
1-7-7. Safety at the workplace

Caution! Risk of slipping
There is a danger of slipping if oil or coolant spills on the floor.
You can be seriously injured if you slip while holding heavy parts
or sharp tools.
Please follow the listed advice:
 Keep the workplace clean and tidy.
 Do not place anything on top of the NC controller. Items may
fall and cause damage or injury.
 Do not leave unnecessary tooling nearby the machinery.
 Ensure proper lighting to have clear visual working conditions.
6175-E P-14
1-8. Tools/Tool change

Use sharp tools carefully! Risk of injury
Always wear protective gloves. Never touch a moving tool.
Wear tight-fitting clothing in order to avoid accidents.
In particular, avoid wearing ties, scarves, rings, and necklaces.
There is a danger of getting caught in moving tools or tool holders.
If you have long hair, bundle your hair by wearing a hat or other
head wear.
Beware of protruding tools! Risk of injury
Tool change can be performed only when the target tool is set at
the tool change position.
All tools used on this machine may be used only within the limited
speed. If the circumferential speed (number of revolutions) is too
high, there is a risk of destruction of the tool and, therefore, an
increased risk of accident for the operator.
During tool change, make sure not to re-start the machine. (If
necessary, engage the safety lock to secure the protective door so
it does not close inadvertently.) Maintain the balance of all tools in
accordance with the specifications from the machine or tool
manufacturer. If the specifications differ, comply with the
requirements for maintaining the best balance.
6175-E P-15
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-1. Features of this machine

The MB-V series is a high-speed high-precision vertical machining center design for machining of
small to medium sized workpieces.
This vertical machining center is built on our rich experience and unparalleled track record both in
small and medium machining centers such as the MX-V, MA-V and MA-H series and in large
double-column machining centers. By incorporating new technologies in various parts of the
machine, in addition to meeting demands for high-speed high-precision machining, it can also meet
the recent user requirements for automation and laborsaving with flexibility, and is designed to be a
user-friendly space-saving machine.
The MU-V series is a high-speed high-precision 5-axis machining system designed for machining of
small to medium sized workpieces.
Based on the ACE CENTER MB-V, which is known for its outstanding thermal stability, this machine
is equipped with a trunnion turning table that provides it with high-speed high-precision 5-axis
machining capability.
Besides its base machine's high performance elements such as high-speed positioning and high-
speed ATC, additional features such as high rotation speed, high-precision positioning, and a highly
rigid trunnion turning table make it well suited for a wide variety of machining tasks such as
simultaneous 5-axis machining of aircraft and other parts, consolidation of work processes, and
single-chucking multi-face machining.
6175-E P-16
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
Axis moving directions in the machine coordinate system
Z+ Y+
X+
Z
Axes
A
C
ME12013R1200400010001
Fig. 2-1
6175-E P-17
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-1-1. Features of machine components
MB-46V(E)
(1) Spindle
 Spindle with No.40 taper, driven by a built-in motor, Max. speed of 8,000 min-1.
(Optional: No.40 spindle Max. speed 15,000, 20,000, 25,000, 35,000, No.50 spindle Max.
speed 6,000, 12,000)
 High-power spindle: 11 kW/7.5 kW (15 hp/10 hp) (10 min./cont. 8,000 min-1), 198 N-m (146
lbf-ft).
(2) Chip disposal
 Max. 190 L (50.2 gal) (Effective 100 L (26.4 gal)) large coolant tank.
 60 L (15.9 gal) large chip bucket.
 Backside chip disposal making cleaning possible even during operation.
MB-56V
(1) Spindle
speed 6,000, 12,000)
lbf-ft).
(2) Chip disposal

6175-E P-18
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-66V
(1) Spindle
speed 6,000, 12,000)
lbf-ft).
(2) Chip disposal
MF-46V
(1) Spindle
speed 6,000, 12,000)
lbf-ft).
(2) Chip disposal
 Max. 420 L (111 gal) (Effective 220 L (58.1 gal)) large coolant tank.
MB-56V-AW
(1) Spindle
speed 6,000, 12,000)
lbf-ft).
(2) Chip disposal
 Max. 1,600 L (422.7 gal) (Effective 700 L (184.9 gal)) large coolant tank.

6175-E P-19
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MU-400V II
(1) Spindle
(Optional: No.40 spindle Max. speed 15,000, 20,000, 25,000, 35,000)
lbf-ft).
(2) Chip disposal

6175-E P-20
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-1-2. Features of machine functions
MB-46V(E)
(1) Hi-speed positioning at X, Y: 40 m/min (131 fpm), Z: 32 m/min (105 fpm) and rapid traverse ATC
at 1.2 sec. (T-T time).
(2) Positioning accuracy : ± 0.004 mm (0.00016 in.), repeatability: ± 0.0015 mm (0.000059 in.).
(3) Extremely low thermal deformation realized by a unique construction and control of the
machine.
(4) Energy saving and clean environment provided by design without hydraulic unit.
(5) Superior operability through designs such as ability to load tools on the magazine from front of
the machine.
(6) A full-enclosure shielding (w/ceiling) is provided as a standard equipment to keep the working
environment clean.
MB-56V
machine.
the machine.
environment clean.
MB-66V
machine.
the machine.
environment clean.
6175-E P-21
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MF-46V
machine.
(4) Superior operability through designs such as ability to load tools on the magazine from the APC
side.
environment clean.
MB-56V-AW
machine.
(4) Superior operability through designs such as ability to load tools on the magazine easily.
environment clean.
MU-400V II
(1) Hi-speed positioning at X, Y: 40 m/min (131 fpm), Z: 32 m/min (105 fpm), A 14,400 degrees/
min, C 18,000 degrees/min, and rapid traverse ATC at 1.2 sec. (T-T time).
(3) High precision: A-, C-axes indexing accuracy ±4 sec., repeatability ±1 sec.
machine.
the machine.
environment clean.
6175-E P-22
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-2. Parts of the machine
2-2-1. Main unit
MB-46V(E)
ME12013R1200400160001
Fig. 2-2
1 X-axis bellows cover 7 NC control box

2 Crossrail 8 Spindlehead
3 Spindle cooling unit 9 Operation panel
4 Coolant tank 10 Table
5 ATC magazine 11 Full-enclosure shielding
6 Bed
6175-E P-23
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-56V
ME12013R1200400170001
Fig. 2-3
1 NC control box 6 X-axis bellows cover

2 Crossrail 7 Spindlehead
3 Spindle cooling unit 8 Operation panel
4 Coolant tank 9 Table
6175-E P-24
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-66V
ME12013R1200400180001
Fig. 2-4
1 NC control box 7 Bed

2 X-axis bellows cover 8 Spindlehead
3 Crossrail 9 Operation panel
4 Spindle cooling unit 10 Table
5 Coolant tank 11 Full-enclosure shielding
6 ATC magazine
6175-E P-25
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MF-46V
(1) (7)
(8)
(2)
(3) (9)
(10)
(4)
(11)
(5)
(12)
(13)
(6)
ME12013R1200400190001
Fig. 2-5
1 Crossrail 8 NC control box

2 X-axis bellows cover 9 Lift-up conveyor (optional)
3 ATC magazine 10 NC operation panel
4 ATC operation panel 11 Coolant tank (optional)
5 Pallet (APC) 12 Bed
6 APC operation panel 13 Full-enclosure shielding
7 Spindlehead
6175-E P-26
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-56V-AW
ME12013R1200400200001
Fig. 2-6
1 NC control box 6 Spindlehead

3 Spindle cooling unit 8 Table
5 X-axis bellows cover
6175-E P-27
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MU-400V II
ME12013R1200400210001
Fig. 2-7
1 X-axis bellows cover 7 Spindlehead

3 Spindle cooling unit 9 A-, C-axes table
4 Coolant tank 10 Bed
6 NC control box
[Travel 762 (30)]
[381 (15)] [381 (15)]
Travel 460 (18.11) Travel 560 (22.05) MB-46V(E)
230 (9.05) 230 (9.05) 280 (11.02) 280 (11.02)

2-3-1. Machining range
Dimensions in [ ] are for VE.

Travel 460 (18.11)
Fig. 2-8
Y-axis (Table forward/backward travel) X-axis (Saddle left/right travel)
Z-axis (Spindlehead up/down travel)

150 (5.91)
380 (14.96) 380 (14.96)

2-3. Machining range and workpiece dimensions
460 (18.11) 760 (29.92)
[500 (19.69)] [500 (19.69)]
[1,000 (39.37)]
ME12013R1200400230001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-28
MB-56V
Travel 560 (22.05) Travel 1,050 (41.34)
280 (11.02) 280 (11.02) 525 (20.66) 525 (20.66)
Fig. 2-9
Travel 460 (18.11)

150 (5.91)
560 (22.04) 650 (25.59) 650 (25.59)
1,300 (51.18)
ME12013R1200400240001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-29
Travel 660 (25.98) Travel 1,500 (59.06)
MB-66V
330 (12.99) 330 (12.99) 750 (29.52) 750 (29.52)
Fig. 2-10
660 (25.98)
Z-axis (Spindlehead up/down

travel)

150
(5.91)
660 (25.98) 765 (30.11) 765 (30.11)
1,530 (60.23)
ME12013R1200400250001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-30
Travel 560 (22.05) Travel 762 (30)
MF-46V
100 (3.93) 460 (18.11)

Travel 460 (18.11)
Y-axis (Pallet forward/backward travel)
Fig. 2-11
X-axis (Saddle left/right travel)
Values in [ ] is valid when pallet with T-slot is used.

(5.91)]
180 (7.09) [150
460 (18.11) 760 (29.92)
ME12013R1200400260001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-31
560 (22.05) (Y-axis st.) 1,050 (41.34) (X-axis st.)
280 (11.02) 280 (11.02) 525 (20.66) 525 (20.66)

MB-56V-AW
Y-axis (Table forward/backward travel)

460 (18.11) (Z-axis st.)

X-axis (Saddle left/right travel)
Fig. 2-12
550 (21.65)
650 (25.59) 860 (33.85)
ME12013R1200400270001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-32
6175-E P-33
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MU-400V II
<Travel range>
X-axis: 762 mm (30 in.)
Y-axis: 460 mm (18.11 in.)
Z-axis: 460 mm (18.11 in.)
A-axis: +20 to -110 degrees
C-axis: 360 degrees
el 762 X-
i s trav 5)
381 (1
5) axis tra
v
Y -ax 0 (9.0 el
) 2 3
.11 381 (1
(18 .05
) 5 )
460 ( 9
230
460 (18.11) Z-axis

travel
30 (1.18)
70 (2.75)
100 (3.93)
ME12013R1200400280001
Fig. 2-13
6175-E P-34
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
Y-axis travel
460 (18.11)
177.3 (6.98) 193 (7.59)
(2.16)
55
230 (9.05) 230 (9.05)
Max. 490 (19.29)

(18.11)
460
305 (12.01)
Z-axis travel
Φ600 (23.62)
Φ400 (15.75)
300 (11.81)
70
(2.75)
A-axis center of rotation
227 (8.93)
400 (15.74)
ME12013R1200400280002
During A-axis = 90 degrees rotation

Fig. 2-14
 Maximum rotatable workpiece size (Machinable area may be limited depending on A-axis rotation
angle.)
6175-E P-35
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-3-2. Dimensions inside full-enclosure shielding
MB-46V
1,231 (48.46) 67 (2.64) (CE)

76 (2.99)
365 (14.37)
385 (15.16)
230 (9.05) 160 (6.30) Y 460 (18.11) Table width 230 (9.05) Y 151 (5.94)
340 (13.38)
380 (14.96)
280 (11.02)
720 (28.35) Door opening width
760 (29.92) Table length

560 (22.05) X travel
678 (26.69) (CE)

687 (27.05)
X
280 (11.02)
380 (14.96)
SP
X
240 (9.45)
RSTA
ME12013R1200400300001
Fig. 2-15
 Distance from edge of table

Left Right Front Back
240 mm (9.45 in.) 340 mm (13.39 in.) 151 mm (5.94 in.) 160 mm (6.30 in.)
Table 2-1
6175-E P-36
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
 The next tool can stand by downward at the RS position.
 The magazine's shutter is closed during machining operation.

MB-46VE
762 (30) X travel

230 (9.05) 160 (6.30)
381 (15) 381 (15)

1,231 (48.46)
460 (18.11) Table width
330 (12.99)
Fig. 2-16
230 (9.05)
687 (27.05)
678 (26.69) (CE)
500 (19.68) 500 (19.68)

151 (5.94)
850 (33.46) Door opening width 385 (15.16)
221 (8.70) 1,000 (39.37) Table length 355 (13.98)

76 (2.99)
67 (2.64) (CE)
ME12013R1200400330001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-37
6175-E P-38
SECTION 2 OUTLINE

240 mm (9.45 in.) 330 mm (12.99 in.) 151 mm (5.94 in.) 160 mm (6.30 in.)
Table 2-2

6175-E P-39
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-56V
1,436 (56.54)
720 (28.34) 716 (28.19)
660 (25.98) 56 (2.20)
25
(0.98)
100 (3.94)
365 (14.37)
340 (13.38)
385 (15.16)
525 (20.66)
680 (26.77)
650 (25.59)
630 (24.8)
1,328.7 (52.311) Door opening width

1,050 (41.34) (X-axis travel)
1,300 (51.18) Table length
1,880 (74.02)
525 (20.66)
698.7 (27.507)
650 (25.59)
15.5 (0.61) (7.854)
199.5
(8.46)
(6.547)
215
166.3
423.6 (16.677) 641.8 (25.267) 290.6 (11.441)

280 (11.02)
160 (6.30) 560 (22.05) Table width 280 (11.02) 76 (2.99)
ME12013R1200400310001
Fig. 2-17

199.5 mm (7.854 in.) 340 mm (13.39 in.) 100 mm (3.94 in.) 160 mm (6.30 in.)
Table 2-3

6175-E P-40
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-66V
1,500 (59.05)
330 (12.99) 86.2 (3.393)

750 (29.52) 750 (29.52)
315 (12.40)
97.5
765 (30.11) 765 (30.11)
746.2 (29.377)
18.4 (0.724) (3.838)
660 (25.98) Table
1,555.7 (61.248)
1,048.1 (41.263)
width
750.7 (29.555)
809.5 (31.87)
100
1,530 (60.24) Table length 415 (16.33)
(12.99)
(3.93)
330
133.8 (5.267)
90.7 (3.57)
58.8 (2.314)
221.2
(8.708)
664.3 (26.153) 637.7 (25.106)

201
(7.91) 1,302 (51.25) 542 (21.33)
2,045 (80.51)
1,500 (59.06) st.
400 (15.75) (Max. tool length)
(7.87)
200
(ATC home position) 660 (25.98) st.

Inside tilted cover
810 (31.88)
400 (15.74)
(Removable)
410 (16.14)
(6.69)]
[170
(3.74) (4.52)
95 115
(5.91)
150
[40
(1.57)]
278 (10.94)
71 (2.79)
136 (5.35)
765 (30.11) 765 (30.11) 291 (11.45)
100 (3.93) 1,530 (60.24) (Table) 415 (16.33) 65 (2.55)
2,940 (115.74)
ME12013R1200400320001
Fig. 2-18

100 mm (3.94 in.) Max. 415 mm (16.34 in.) Max. 149.5 mm (5.886 in.) 86.2 mm (3.394 in.)
(413.4 mm (16.276 in.)) (90.7 mm (3.571 in.))
Table 2-4
6175-E P-41
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
 The ATC shutter is closed during machining operation.
 Leave at least 10 mm (0.39 in.) of safety distance between items loaded on the table and the
full-enclosure shielding.
1,050 (41.34) (X-axis travel)
X 525 (20.66) X 525 (20.66)
160 (6.30)
MB-56V-AW
280 (11.02)
Y
423.6 (16.677)
720 (28.34)
641.8 (25.267)

1,563 (61.53)
Fig. 2-19
135
15.5 (0.61) 860 (33.85) (5.31) 25 (0.98)
843 (33.18)
853 (33.58)
Y
280 (11.02)
414.6 (16.322)
RS 215 (8.46) 150 (5.91)
293 (11.53)
200 (7.87)
TA
604 (23.77)
391 (15.39) 590 (23.22)
SP
441 (17.36) 981 (38.62) Door opening width 430 (16.92)
33 (1.29) 1,885 (74.21)
ME12013R1200400340001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-42
MU-400V II
Φ400
(15.75)
Z-axis st.
460 (18.11)
Fig. 2-20
30
(1.18)
400 (15.74)
100
(3.93)
762 (30.00) 230 (9.05) 460 (18.11) 230 (9.05)

X-axis st. X-axis st.
ME12013R1200400350001
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-43
Values in [ ] are valid when pallet with T-slot is used.
Fig. 2-21
ME12013R1200400370001
268 (10.55) 32 (1.25)
30 (1.18)
Φ63
(2.48)
115
Φ125 (4.92)
adjacent tool)
(4.52)
(Maximum tool diameter with no
16.6 (0.653)
268
(10.55) 32 (1.25)
255 (8.86)
300
[195 (7.68)] (11.81) 560 (22.05) (Y-axis st.)
65.4
(2.574) 380 (14.96) 330 (12.99)
(Edge of Y-axis st.)
540 (21.26) [510 (20.08)] 40 (1.57)
Gap 19.9 (0.783) (4
Φ1 .92)
25
Φ120 (4.72)
Φ5
45
R66
(AP
( 21
7.5
[122.5 (4.823)]
Cd
.46
)
(16.54
(26
loadable range
oor
Φ420 )
210 (8.26)
swi
.280
)
[540 (21.26)]
Gap 21 (0.83)
ng r
Max. stroke height 580 (22.83) [550 (21.65)] 60

(2.36)
adiu
60 (2.36)
s)
591 (23.26)
Shaded area shows workpiece
640 (25.19)
92
150 (5.91)
3.7
8
100
6(
3
(3.93)
.6 36
95
2)
510 (20.07)
193.2
(7.606)
460 (18.11)
760 (29.92)
43.4 R65
(1.708) 6.4 (0.251) 0 (25
762 (30.00) (X-axis st.)

.59
)
380 (14.96)
150 (5.91)
180 (7.09) 45
[150 (5.91)] 460 (18.11) (1.77)
(Z-axis st.) 80
380 (14.96) (3.14)
150 (5.91) 460 (18.11)
MF-46VA
2-3-3. Loading range (MF-46VA/46VB only)
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-44
Fig. 2-22
ME12013R1200400380001
Φ152 (5.98)
Φ100 (3.94)
with no adjacent tool)

(Maximum tool diameter
254 (10) 40 (1.57) 46 (1.81)

170 (6.69)
254 46 23.3 (0.917)
(10) (1.81)
170 (6.69)
[140 (5.51)] 300 101.8
(11.81) (4.007)
560 (22.04)
(Y-axis st.)
380 (14.96) 330 (12.99)
540 (21.25) 40 (1.57) (Edge of Y-axis st.)
[510 (20.08)] Gap 28.9 (1.138)
Φ120 (4.72)
(122.5)
Φ
(23 592
(17.
.31
0
)
166 (6.53)
Φ44 32)
Gap 31 (1.22)
220 (8.66)
(R6
7.5 6
Max. workpiece height 580 60

105 (4.13)
APC
19 2 105 (22.83) [550 (21.65)] (2.36)

doo
60 (2.36)
(0.74) (0.07) (4.13)

150 (5.91)
r sw
45
ing
(1.77)
601 (23.66)
[135 640 (25.20) (Edge of Z-axis st.)
ra
(5.31)] 142.2 90
dius
(5.598) (3.54) 100 (3.93)

)
510 (20.07)
cent tools) ATC
93 25
(0.98)
M6
.0 18
4(
36
.62
41 1
)
381 (15.00) (Edge of X-axis st.)

Shaded area shows workpiece loadable range
760 (29.92)
460 (18.11)
80PX8 = 640
Interference area for maximum diameter tool (w/no adja-
380 (14.96)
762 (30) (X-axis st.)

150 (5.91)
60 (2.36)
M12
45
(1.77) 360 (14.17)
80Px4 = 320 70 (2.75)
70 (2.75) 380 (14.96) 80 (3.14)
180 (7.08) 460 (18.11) 460 (18.11) 20 (0.78)
[150 (5.91)] (Z-axis st.)
150 (5.91)
MF-46VB
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
6175-E P-45
6175-E P-46
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-3-4. Maximum workpiece swing diameter / height (MU-400V II only)
MU-400V II
In principle, maximum workpiece dimension is Φ400 (15.75) x height 400 mm (15.75 in.). However,
as long as the weight does not exceed maximum load of 300 kg (660 lb), the maximum workpiece
dimension that can be rotated is the following.
However, depending on the A-axis position, the workpiece may exceed the machinable area.
)
.62
23
0(
60
Φ600 (23.62)
Φ400 (15.75)
400 (15.74)
227 (8.93)
ME12013R1200400390001
Fig. 2-23
6175-E P-47
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-3-5. Precautions related to workpieces and tools

(1) Workpiece materials
The machine can cut ordinary structural steels such as carbon steel, ferrous material such as
castings, and non-ferrous material such as aluminum.
The machine can also cut non-metallic materials such as ceramics or graphite. These
materials, however, require dust preventive measures to protect the human body and the
machine. For information on safety measures, Contact OKUMA.
Additionally, when working on flammable materials, make sure to take every safety precaution.
(2) Maximum Workpiece Size and Mass

For more information on maximum workpiece size and mass, refer to the [Separate volume
technical sheet].
Please note that if the workpiece is not well balanced, the machine may not perform to
specification, even if maximum workpiece size and mass are not exceeded. Always be sure that
the workpiece is well balanced and that it is securely fastened to ensure safe machining
operation.
(3) Maximum Tool Size and Mass

For maximum tool size, be sure to comply with the requirements specified in the [Separate
volume technical sheet] and [SECTION 7, 7-3. ATC tool dimensions]. Even if the tool does not
exceed the maximum mass, it cannot be used exceeding the [SECTION 7, 7-3-5. Maximum tool
mass moment]. If the tool is used at a speed exceeding the limit, it could result in tool breakage.
6175-E P-48
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-4. Safety functions
2-4-1. Interlock and door lock functions

The machine incorporates the automatic lock mechanism and interlock function for the front door in
the full enclosure shielding to ensure the safety of machine operators and other workers. These
door lock functions are described below.
 During automatic operation, the door is automatically locked.
 AUTO or MDI cannot be launched while the door is open.
 When changing the setup or checking the program, it is possible to disable the door interlock
switch and to operate the spindle and feed the axis while the door is left open. For this,
however, spindle speed and axis feed rate is limited to within a specified speed.
Door interlock switch

 Never remove or modify the door interlock switch.
 If the switch becomes faulty, please contact OKUMA or OKUMA's
service representative immediately. It is strictly forbidden to operate
the machine with the faulty door interlock switch.
 Failure to observe these instructions may lead to getting caught in
moving parts or hitting them.
It may also result in being caught in rotating tools.
2-4-2. Door lock switch positions and types
Position Class
Operation door Spring lock
APC door Electromagnetic lock
Magazine door Electromagnetic lock
Table 2-5
The operation door is locked when the power is turned off.

Therefore, before you enter the machine, be sure to use a door stopper
to prevent the door from locking so you do not get trapped inside the
machine.
6175-E P-49
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
2-4-3. Door lock releasing in emergency

It is possible to open the door when the machine makes an emergency stop. However, when the
power is shut off, or when there is a power outage, the door will not open. In such a case, release
the door lock through the following procedure:
Procedure :
1- The door lock switch is mounted on the lower right of the operation door. (See figure for
location.)
2- Remove the cap on the release keyhole of the door lock switch, and insert the special
release key into the hole.
3- Turn the special release key to UNLOCK to release the lock.
4- Open the door.
 When restarting the machine, turn the special release key from UNLOCK to LOCK.
 When the door is in unlock state, the machine does not operate even if the door is
closed.
 Only the person in charge shall keep the special release key.
 When entering the enclosure shielding after unlocking the door lock
switch, watch the spindle because it might be coasting. Do not get
near the spindle until you confirm that the spindle is stopped.
 Do not unlock the door during machine operation. The machine will
stop immediately if the door is unlocked.
6175-E P-50
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-46V(E)
Door lock switch
Operation panel
Release key slot
LOCK
UNLOCK
Operation door Door lock switch release key
ME12013R1200400440001
Fig. 2-24
6175-E P-51
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-56V
Door lock switch
Release key slot
LOCK
Operation door
UNLOCK
Door lock switch release key
ME12013R1200400440002
Fig. 2-25
6175-E P-52
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-66V
Door lock switch
Release key slot
LOCK
Operation door
UNLOCK
ME12013R1200400440003
Fig. 2-26
6175-E P-53
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MF-46V
Door lock switch
Release key slot
LOCK
Operation door
UNLOCK
ME12013R1200400440004
Fig. 2-27
6175-E P-54
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MB-56V-AW
Door lock switch
Operation door
Release key slot
LOCK
UNLOCK
ME12013R1200400440005
Fig. 2-28
6175-E P-55
SECTION 2 OUTLINE
MU-400V II
Door lock switch
Release key slot
Operation door LOCK
UNLOCK
ME12013R1200400440006
Fig. 2-29
6175-E P-56
SECTION 3 TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION
3-1. About safety

Protective clothing
Make sure you wear protective gear when performing work.
The machine can cause crush injuries

Use only means of transportation (fork lift, crane, ropes) of sufficient power
and size. Do not step under the machine when it is being moved.
Maintain a safe distance from the machine.
Do not lift the machine higher than necessary. Do not touch the bottom of
the machine by hand. Observe the floor loading capacity. The floor must
be capable of sustaining the machine load. A stress analyst should be
appointed to do the calculations.
The machine can topple over
[SECTION 3, 3-2. Transporting the machine] covers the following content.
 Weight
 Installation places
 Safety ropes
 The prescribed lifting gear
These instructions must be strictly observed when transporting the

machine and its components. All other methods for transporting the
machine or its components are not allowed.
The lifting gear must be theoretically appropriate for the situation and its permissible load bearing
capacity must be adequate. The chains, ropes, hooks and swivel eye bolts must also be able to
safely support these weights.
Assign the job of applying load and instructing crane operators only to qualified staff! The person
giving instructions must be in the operator's range of sight or have verbal contact with the operator.
Secure lifting rods with adjusting rings! The rope or the machine part must not slip on the rod.
Transportation safety devices must not be disassembled during transportation and installation.
If the part to be lifted has sharp edges, put pads in order to prevent the rope or the machine from
being damaged.
Never lift the machine part all of a sudden or with a jerk with the lifting gear or a crane. Lift slowly.
Make sure that the load is well balanced.
6175-E P-57
3-2. Transporting the machine

With the exception of the attachment units such as the coolant tank (kit configuration), chip pan (kit
configuration), and the APC (optional unit for some models), in principal, the machine can be moved
or transported as a single unit. Installation is performed by OKUMA representatives dispatched to
the site. After the machine arrives at your facility, remove the packaging material and anti-rust oil,
and wait for the OKUMA representative.
3-2-1. Lifting the machine

 Moving the machine in a plant for changing the layout, etc.
 Lifting the machine to load it on to a truck
MB-46V(E)
(3)
(4)
(1) (5)
Detail of the fixture
(2)
ME12013R1200500070001
Fig. 3-1
1 Balance beam 4 X-axis fixture

2 Lifting hook 5 Y-axis fixture
3 Z-axis fixture
6175-E P-58
To lift the machine, follow the steps below: (For standard specification machine)
Procedure :
1- Center the X-axis (spindlehead, saddle).
2- Use the retaining bolt for the crossrail cover under the saddle and the retaining bolt for the
saddle bottom cover to jointly secure the X-axis fixture.
3- Center the Y-axis (table). (This is the position to attach the table and crossrail fixture.)
4- Attach the Y-axis fixture by jointly securing it with the retaining bolt for the crossrail front side
cover; use the T-slot on the table to tighten the table securing bolt.
5- Lower the spindlehead until it touches the fixture attached to the table. The tip of the spindle
should be roughly 150 mm (5.91 in.) from the top surface of the table. (This is the lowest
position for the Z-axis.)
6- Remove oil from the oil temperature controller and coolant from the coolant tank.
7- Remove the coolant hose and electrical cable from the coolant tank (kit configuration).
8- Remove the hose and electrical cable from the APC (optional).
9- Remove the exterior cover from the lower front and attach lifting hooks to the left and right
front of the bed.
 Perform the above steps (1) to (5) before turning off the power. In
each step, carefully operate the machine using the pulse handle.
There is a danger of injury if caught between moving parts.
 After fixing, never attempt to further lower the spindlehead by
operating the pulse handle with the fixture being attached. This may
result in overloading and may burn out the Z-axis motor.
 Insert rust prevention sheet between fixture and table, fixture and
spindlehead, and fixture and column to prevent damage or rust
formation.
 OKUMA will provide balance beams, lifting tools, and fixtures during
installation, and will collect these items upon completion of
installation (applicable for Japan).
If these items become necessary for factory layout change or other
reasons, please contact your OKUMA representative or distributor.
6175-E P-59
Precautions for lifting the machine
1) Use a wire rope that is thick enough to withstand a maximum load of

100 kN (22,500 lbf).
Failure to do so may result in dropping the machine leading to death
or serious injury.
2) The wire should not come into direct contact with any part of the
machine other than the bed or crossrail. Use a wire rope with
suitable length so it does not form an excessively wide angle when
lifting.
3) Lift the machine carefully while balancing it.
4) When lowering the machine, use care not to hit the machine against
the floor.
Machine body Coolant tank

(w/20 tool ATC) 6,800 kg (14,960 lb)
MB-46VA
(w/32 tool ATC) 7,000 kg (15,400 lb)
(w/20 tool ATC) 7,000 kg (15,400 lb)
MB-46VB
(w/32 tool ATC) 7,200 kg (15,840 lb)
190 kg (418 lb) (Without
(w/20 tool ATC) 7,100 kg (15,620 lb)
coolant)
MB-46VAE (w/32 tool ATC) 7,300 kg (16,060 lb)
(w/48 tool ATC) 7,550 kg (16,610 lb)
(w/20 tool ATC) 7,300 kg (16,060 lb)
MB-46VBE
(w/32 tool ATC) 7,500 kg (16,500 lb)
Table 3-1
 High cross specification = Standard cross specification + 300 kg (660 lb)
6175-E P-60
MB-56V
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Detail of the fixture
(2)
ME12013R1200500090001
Fig. 3-2

3 Z-axis fixture
Procedure :
6175-E P-61
front of the bed.
formation.

100 kN (22,500 lbf).
or serious injury.
lifting.
the floor.

(w/20 tool ATC) 8,300 kg (18,260 lb)
MB-56VA (w/32 tool ATC) 8,500 kg (18,700 lb)
(w/48 tool ATC) 8,750 kg (19,250 lb)
coolant)
(w/20 tool ATC) 8,500 kg (18,700 lb)
MB-56VB
(w/32 tool ATC) 8,700 kg (19,140 lb)
Table 3-2
 High cross specification = Standard cross specification + 350 kg (770 lb)
6175-E P-62
MB-66V
(3)
(4)
(1)
Detail of the fixture (5)
M10
M10
(2)
ME12013R1200500110001
Fig. 3-3

3 Z-axis fixture
Procedure :
4- Attach the Y-axis fixture by jointly securing it with the retaining bolt for the crossrail front left
side cover; attach the left side of the table and the Y-axis fixture.
6175-E P-63
front of the bed.
formation.
6175-E P-64

100 kN (22,500 lbf).
or serious injury.
lifting.
the floor.

(w/20 tool ATC) 11,200 kg (24,640 lb)
MB-66VA (w/32 tool ATC) 11,500 kg (25,300 lb)
coolant)
(w/48 tool ATC) 11,750 kg (25,850 lb)
(w/20 tool ATC) 11,800 kg (25,960 lb)
MB-66VB (w/32 tool ATC) 12,200 kg (26,840 lb)
coolant)
(w/48 tool ATC) 12,800 kg (28,160 lb)
Table 3-3
6175-E P-65
MF-46V
(3)
(4)
(5)
Detail of the fixture
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200500130001
Fig. 3-4

2 Lifting fixtures 5 Y-axis fixture
3 Z-axis fixture
Procedure :
3- Position the Y-axis (table) 10 mm (0.39 in.) towards the crossrail from the spindle center
position. (This is the position to attach the table and crossrail fixture.)
cover; use the tapped holes or the T-slots of the pallet to tighten the table securing bolt.
5- Lower the spindlehead until it touches the fixture attached to the table. From the top surface
of the table, the tip of the spindle should be roughly 180 mm (7.09 in.) when using a pallet
with tapped holes, or 150 mm (5.91 in.) when using a pallet with T-slots. (This is the lowest
6175-E P-66
6- Remove oil from the hydraulic unit, oil from the oil temperature controller, or coolant from the
coolant tank.
8- Remove the pallet from the APC setup station and package it separately. (There is risk that it
may come off or be damaged from impact during driving.)
formation.

250 kN (56,250 lbf).
or serious injury.
lifting.
the floor.

(w/20 tool ATC) 9,700 kg (21,340 lb)
MF-46VA (w/32 tool ATC) 9,900 kg (21,780 lb)
600 kg (1,320 lb) (Without
(w/48 tool ATC) 10,150 kg (22,330 lb)
coolant)
(w/20 tool ATC) 9,900 kg (21,780 lb)
MF-46VB
(w/32 tool ATC) 10,100 kg (22,220 lb)
Table 3-4
6175-E P-67
MB-56V-AW
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
Detail of the
fixture
(2)
ME12013R1200500150001
Fig. 3-5
1 Balance beam 4 Z-axis fixture

3 X-axis fixture
Procedure :
cover; use the tapped hole on the jig to tighten the table securing bolt.
5- Lower the spindlehead until it touches the fixture attached to the jig.
7- Remove the coolant hose and electrical cable from the coolant tank (optional).
6175-E P-68
front of the bed.
formation.

100 kN (22,500 lbf).
or serious injury.
lifting.
the floor.
Machine body
(w/20 tool ATC) 9,800 kg (21,560 lb)
MB-56VA-AW (w/32 tool ATC) 10,000 kg (22,000 lb)
(w/48 tool ATC) 10,250 kg (22,550 lb)
(w/20 tool ATC) 10,000 kg (22,000 lb)
MB-56VB-AW
(w/32 tool ATC) 10,200 kg (22,440 lb)
Table 3-5
6175-E P-69
MU-400V II
(3)
(4)
(1)
Detail of the fixture (5)
(2)
ME12013R1200500170001
Fig. 3-6

3 Z-axis fixture
Procedure :
4- Position the A-, C-axes table to 0°.
should be roughly 150 mm (5.91 in.) from the top surface of the table.
6175-E P-70
7- Shut off the machine power.
8- Remove oil from the hydraulic unit, oil from the oil temperature controller, or coolant from the
coolant tank.
10- Remove the hose and electrical cable from the hydraulic unit and APC (optional).
front of the bed.
formation.
6175-E P-71

100 kN (22,500 lbf).
or serious injury.
lifting.
the floor.

(w/20 tool ATC) 8,300 kg (18,260 lb)
MU-400V II (w/32 tool ATC) 8,500 kg (18,700 lb)
coolant)
(w/48 tool ATC) 8,700 kg (19,140 lb)
Table 3-6
6175-E P-72
3-2-2. Lifting the coolant tank (except MB-56V-AW)

Loosen the jack bolts on the tank bottom face and pull out the tank from the rear of the machine.
Hook the wire ropes on the tank sides. Then, lift the coolant tank.
MB-46V(E), MU-400V II
190 kg (418 lb)
ME12013R1200500220001
Fig. 3-7
Remove coolant before transportation.

6175-E P-73
MB-56V
210 kg (462 lb)
ME12013R1200500230001
Fig. 3-8

6175-E P-74
MF-46V
ME12013R1200500240001
Fig. 3-9

6175-E P-75
MB-66V
250 kg (550 lb)
ME12013R1200500250001
Fig. 3-10

6175-E P-76
3-2-3. Cautions for truck transportation

When transporting the machine by truck, take notice of the following points as well as observation of
lifting instructions described above.
(1) Check that the fixtures are firmly fixed.
(2) To protect the disconnected hoses and cables from dirt, fasten them to the machine after
wrapping them in cloth or vinyl sheet.
(3) The machine can be transported fully covered.
(4) Secure the operation panel with rope or tape so that it does not rotate.
3-2-4. When removing the Z-axis motor

(1) Since the Z-axis motor is equipped with a brake (brake is ON when power is OFF), removal of
the Y-axis motor causes the spindlehead to drop. Always secure the spindlehead by attaching a
fixture between the spindlehead and table before removing the Y-axis motor.
(2) When removing the Z-axis motor, do so in a position where its relative position can be
reinstated, because changes made to the spindlehead position and the Z-axis detector value
can influence pitch error correction.
(For example, position where the distance from the end of the spindlehead to the table is 150
mm (5.91 in.) (MB-46V(E)/56V/66V, MU-400V II), 180 mm (7.09 in.) (MF-46V), or 480 mm (18.9
in.) (MB-56V-AW).
6175-E P-77
3-3. Preparation before delivery
3-3-1. About fixtures
Before connecting the main power cable to the machine, the fixtures used to secure the machine
during transportation must be removed.
The fixtures are red in color. Store the removed fixtures in a safe place.
These fixtures will be used to secure the machine when the machine is moved or repositioned in
the future.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the machine.
6175-E P-78
3-4. Machine installation
3-4-1. Temporary leveling

(1) Clean the foundation plates free of oily substances.
(2) Set the distance between the lower part of the foundation seat and the bottom of the bed to be
approximately 70 mm (2.76 in.).
(3) If the concrete floor is significantly inclined or uneven, procure an iron sheet and correct the
floor (Particularly pay attention to inclination and height of coolant tank).
(4) Adjust the 4 jack bolts on the perimeter so that they are equally tightened.
3-4-2. Assembling the units and parts shipped separately and preparing
for operation
(1) To install the units and parts shipped separately, reverse the procedure for removal for
transportation.
(2) Fill each tank and reservoir with the specified oil according to Lubrication Chart.
(3) Connect power supply cables and pneumatic pipes.
(4) Clean the machine by removing dirt from each component.
(5) Check the phase of the power source by operating the coolant unit pump motor.
Reverse motion of the motor.

When the motor is rotating in reverse direction and the required pressure is not achieved, turn off
the power supply immediately and correct the power cable connection.
Continuous rotation of the motor in the reverse direction may cause a problem.
(MU-400V II only)
After connecting the hydraulic unit hoses and cables, always move the A-, C-axes slightly using
the pulse handle to check that the load on each of their motors is normal.
If the load is excessive and does not recover after stopping, correct any errors in hose
connection.
6175-E P-79
3-4-3. Leveling the machine (MNTKEY0310)

Setting the machine in a level position greatly affects both working accuracy and service life. The
machine should be carefully leveled during installation.
Use a precision level (0.02 mm/m per reading) to set machine levelness.
Level the machine as follows:
MB-46V(E)/56V/66V/56V-AW, MF-46V
Procedure :
1- Position the spindlehead to the center of vertical travel (Z-axis).
2- Position the table to the center of forward-backward travel (Y-axis).
3- Position the ram saddle (X-axis) to the center of the table.
4- With precision levels placed in the X- and in the Y-axis orientation near the center of the table
(pallet), gently move the table along the Y-axis while taking measurements over the full travel
distance. Next, attach the ram saddle to the level and gently move the ram saddle along the
X-axis while taking measurements over the full travel distance.
Then, adjust the jack bolts of the bed so that the measured results fall within the tolerances
specified in the accuracy test chart.
(1)
ME12013R1200500460001
Fig. 3-11
1 Precision level
6175-E P-80
5- Next, make the square (or a reference cylinder) upright on top of the table and measure the
up/down movement (Z-axis) of the spindlehead with a dial gauge attached to the spindle.
(2)
(1)
ME12013R1200500460002
Also perform measurements in the X-Z direction.

Fig. 3-12
1 Dial gauge 2 Square
6- Attach a dial gauge to the spindle and while manually rotating the spindle, measure the
squareness (swing squareness) between the spindle axis and the table surface to check for
crossrail (bed) tilt.
(1)
300 (11.8
1)
ME12013R1200500460003
Fig. 3-13
1 Block gauge
7- Make adjustments by the 8 (MB-46V(E)/56V/66V/56V-AW), or 10 (MF-46V) jack bolts at the

bottom of the bed. Adjust the jack bolts uniformly so that no jack bolt is floating.
6175-E P-81
8- After adjustment, lock the jack bolts firmly with the lock nuts.
9- Fix the bed to the floor with hole-in (chemical) anchors.
10- Again, check the machine for levelness.
Check the machine for levelness at least once a month also after starting the machine operation. If
required levelness cannot be obtained, readjust the levelness.
6175-E P-82
MU-400V II
Procedure :
1- Position the spindlehead to the center of vertical travel (Z-axis).
2- Position the table to the center of forward-backward travel (Y-axis).
3- Position the ram saddle (X-axis) to the center of the table.
4- With precision levels placed in the X- and in the Y-axis orientation near the center of the table
(pallet), gently move the table along the Y-axis while taking measurements over the full travel
distance. Next, attach the ram saddle to the level and gently move the ram saddle along the
X-axis while taking measurements over the full travel distance.
(1)
ME12013R1200500470001
Fig. 3-14
1 Precision level
6175-E P-83
5- Next, make the square (or a reference cylinder) upright on top of the table and measure the
up/down movement (Z-axis) of the spindlehead with a dial gauge attached to the spindle.
(1)
ME12013R1200500470002
Also perform measurements in the X-Z direction.

Fig. 3-15
1 Square
6- Attach a dial gauge to the spindle and while manually rotating the spindle, measure the
squareness (swing squareness) between the spindle axis and the table surface to check for
crossrail (bed) tilt.
300
(11.8
1)
(1)
ME12013R1200500470003
Fig. 3-16
1 Block gauge
6175-E P-84
7- Make adjustments by the 8 (MU-400V II) jack bolts at the bottom of the bed. Adjust the jack
bolts uniformly so that no jack bolt is floating.
8- After adjustment, lock the jack bolts firmly with the lock nuts.
9- Fix the bed to the floor with hole-in (chemical) anchors.
10- Again, check the machine for levelness.
Check the machine for levelness at least once a month also after starting the machine operation. If
required levelness cannot be obtained, readjust the levelness.
6175-E P-85
SECTION 4 PREPARATION FOR OPERATION
4-1. Supplying lubricating oil/hydraulic oil

Machine parts should be lubricated according to [SECTION 4, 4-1-1. Lubrication oil charts] and
[OPERATION & MAINTENANCE - Installation Preparation]. Check oil level and pump operation
every day.
Prior to shipment, the hydraulic oil tank, the oil-air lubrication oil tank, the spindle cooling oil tank,
and the coolant tank are drained. Fill before installation.
(1) Oil-air lubrication oil
(2) Spindlehead cooling oil
(3) Coolant (If equipped with a coolant tank)
(4) Hydraulic oil for hydraulic unit
Always use the specified oil or its equivalent. Do not use used oil.
Note
The lubrication oil charts have been prepared in accordance with MAS standards. The symbols
used in these charts are described in Lubrication Chart Symbols. Lubricating Oil Specifications in
this section lists oil types to be used.
Lubricating oil
1) Use of improper lubricating oils may lead to poor performance or malfunction of the machine.
2) Be sure to use new oil for lubrication.
3) Always use an oil strainer when feeding oil.
6175-E P-86
4-1-1. Lubrication oil charts
MB-46V(E)
Maintenance interval
(Grease feed terminal)
Drain port
ME12013R1200600020001
Fig. 4-1
Pressure
Lubrication points Lubricating oil Ball screw Ball screw Guide
regulator
Location no. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Z X X Z
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h) 200 200
Maintenance Clean / Replace (h) 2,000

item Replace (h) 2,000
Lubrication oil symbol FC2 1 THK AFJ GREASE
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 15 (4.0) 2 mL 18 mL
Lubrication points Ball screw Guide ATC Oil-air lubrication unit Spindle
Location no. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Y Y
Symbol
Inspection (h) 8 8
Replenish (h) 200 2,000 2,000 1,000 2,000
Clean / Replace (h)
Maintenance Replace (h)
item
1 THK
Lubrication oil symbol 1 THK AFJ GREASE AFJ CKC150 1 Mobil DTE Oil Light HM32
GREASE
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 10 mL 6 mL 8 (2.1) 2.0 (0.53) 380 mL
Table 4-1
Standard accessory: Grease gun (0.9 mL/stroke)
1 Do not use oils that are not listed here.
Note
Clean the lubrication points before feeding oil.
6175-E P-87
MB-56V
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600030001
Fig. 4-2
Pressure
Lubrication points Lubricating oil Ball screw Ball screw Guide
regulator
Z X X Z
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h) 200 200

Tank capacity (L (gal)) 15 (4.0) 2 mL 18 mL
Location no. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Y Y
Symbol
Inspection (h) 8 8
Replenish (h) 200 2,000 2,000 1,000 2,000
Clean / Replace (h)
item
1 THK
Lubrication oil symbol 1 THK AFJ GREASE AFJ CKC150 1 Mobil DTE Oil Light HM32
GREASE
Table 4-2
Note
6175-E P-88
MB-66V
Maintenance
interval
(Back) Drain port (Front)

ME12013R1200600040001
Fig. 4-3
Pressure
Lubrication points Lubricating oil Ball screw, Guide, ATC magazine
regulator
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8 8
Replenish (h) 2 50

Tank capacity (L (gal)) 15 (4.0) 0.4 (0.11)
Lubrication points ATC cam box Oil-air lubrication unit Spindle

Location no. 7 8 9 10 11
Symbol
Inspection (h) 8 8
Replenish (h) 2,000 1,000 2,000
Maintenance Clean / Replace (h)

item Replace (h)
Lubrication oil symbol CKC150 1 Mobil DTE Oil Light HM32
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 8 (2.1) 2.0 (0.53) 380 mL
Table 4-3
2 Once every 50 hours, manually pump 10 times (manual pump specification).
Note
6175-E P-89
MF-46V
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600050001
Fig. 4-4
Pressure Ball Ball Ball

Lubrication points Lubricating oil Guide Guide
regulator screw screw screw
Location no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Z X X Z Y Y
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h) 200 200 200

Tank capacity (L (gal)) 15 (4.0) 2 mL 18 mL 10 mL
Lubrication points ATC Oil-air lubrication unit Hydraulic unit Spindle

Location no. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Symbol
Inspection (h) 8 8 50 8
Replenish (h) 2,000 2,000 1,000 2,000
Clean / Replace (h)
Maintenance Replace (h) 2,000
item
1 THK
Lubrication oil symbol AFJ CKC150 1 Mobil DTE Oil Light HM32 HM32
GREASE
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 6 mL 8 (2.1) 2.0 (0.53) 20 (5.3) 380 mL
Table 4-4
Note
6175-E P-90
MB-56V-AW
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600060001
Fig. 4-5
Pressure
Lubrication points Lubricating oil Ball screw Guide
regulator
Location no. 1 2 3 4 5
X Z X Z
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h) 200

Tank capacity (L (gal)) 15 (4.0) 20 mL
Location no. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Y Y
Symbol
Inspection (h) 8 8
Replenish (h) 200 2,000 2,000 1,000 2,000
Clean / Replace (h)
Maintenance
item Replace (h)
1 THK AFJ
Lubrication oil symbol 1 THK AFJ GREASE CKC150 1 Mobil DTE Oil Light HM32
GREASE
Table 4-5
Note
6175-E P-91
MU-400V II
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600070001
Fig. 4-6
Pressure Ball Ball Ball

Lubrication points Lubricating oil Guide Guide
regulator screw screw screw
Location no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Z X X Z Y Y
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h) 200 200 200

Tank capacity (L (gal)) 15 (4.0) 2 mL 18 mL 10 mL
Lubrication points ATC Oil-air lubrication unit Spindle

Location no. 8 9 10 11 12 13
Symbol
Inspection (h) 8 8
Replenish (h) 2,000 2,000 1,000 2,000
Clean / Replace (h)
item
1 THK
Lubrication oil symbol AFJ CKC150 1 Mobil DTE Oil Light HM32
GREASE
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 6 mL 8 (0.21) 2.0 (0.53) 380 mL
Table 4-6
Note
6175-E P-92
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600070003
Fig. 4-7
Lubrication points Hydraulic unit

Location no. 1 2 3
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h)
Maintenance item Replace (h) 2,000
Lubrication oil symbol HM32
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 20 (5.3)
Table 4-7
Note
Clean the filler port before feeding oil.
6175-E P-93
A-, C-axes table unit
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600070002
Fig. 4-8
Lubrication points A-axis gearbox A-axis hypoid gear C-axis gearbox C-axis hypoid gear
Location no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 50 50 50
Replenish (h) 2,000 200 200 200
Maintenance
Replace (h) 2,000 2,000
item
Lubrication oil symbol CKC220 + extreme-pressure additive
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 2.7 (0.71) 2.8 (0.74) 0.8 (0.21) 2.8 (0.74)
Table 4-8
Note
6175-E P-94
 On hypoid gears, both the designated oil and extreme-pressure additives must be used.
Without extreme-pressure additives, gears can wear out faster.
Specified extreme-pressure additive
PROLONG Anti-friction metal treatment
Anti-Friction Metal Treatment 10 % to 15 % added
 To ensure stable operation of the C-axis, perform the operation cycle under the following
conditions.
Once a week or more:
 A-axis angle within -60 degrees to -110 degrees, and
 Move the C-axis at a speed of 10 min-1 or less for a minimum of 5 minutes
If the above conditions are included in the machining program, it is not necessary to
perform this operation cycle.
6175-E P-95
4-1-2. Symbols
Description Symbol Remarks
Oil level
ME12013R1200600090001
Replenish
ME12013R1200600090002
Change
ME12013R1200600090003
Pressure gauge
ME12013R1200600090004
Thermometer
ME12013R1200600090005
 Clean or replace the filter element.

Filter  Check condition of filter element.
ME12013R1200600090006
Check oil flow by visual inspection through

window, gear, rotary ring or spout devices.
Flow sight
ME12013R1200600090007
Operate manual pump with lever or push button.
Oil pump
ME12013R1200600090008
Clean the magnetic coolant separator.

Separator
ME12013R1200600090009
Time (operating
hours)
ME12013R1200600090010
This symbol is used in combination with other

symbols.
Inspection
ME12013R1200600090011
Table 4-9
6175-E P-96
4-2. Lubrication and inspection method
4-2-1. Supplying oil for the hydraulic unit (MF-46V, MB-56V-AW, MU-400V
II only) (MNTKEY0520)
MF-46V, MB-56V-AW, MU-400V II
(1)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(5)
(6)
ME12013R1200600110001
Fig. 4-9
1 Pressure switch 5 Drain port

2 Pressure adjusting screw 6 Pressure gauge
3 Flow regulating screw 7 Oil filler port
4 Terminal box 8 Oil level gauge
6175-E P-97
Specified oil HM32 (Typical Brand: Mobil DTE Excel 32)

Tank capacity 20 L (5.3 gal)
After filling up, operate the machine once and then replenish the tank.
Oil change interval 2,000 H
10 months at 200 hours/month operation
Table 4-10
[Supplement]
1) For adjustment of the hydraulic unit, refer to the separate [PURCHASED UNIT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL].
2) A warning is issued when the oil level drops, and this is an ALARM-C warning that will disrupt
operation. Always check the oil level before beginning work.
3) Normally use HM32. However, use FC22 (with a viscosity index of 140 or higher) at a
temperature below 10 °C (50 °F).
6175-E P-98
1
9
5
6
7
3
4
2
11
8
12
10
ME12013R1200600110003
Fig. 4-10
6175-E P-99
No. Item Manufacturer Model Quan OKUMA part no.

tity
1 Tank Tokyo Keiki 20 L (5.3 gal) (Tank full capacity 27 L (7.1 1
gal))
2 Piston pump Tokyo Keiki P16VMR-10-CMC-20-S246-J 1
3 Direct-drive motor Toshiba 1.5 kW (2 hp) 4P-200/220V-C19L-T01 1
4 Pressure gauge (w/glycerin) Yodogawa Keiki G-A1/4RX60X16MPA-T 1 T019-400-009-51
(w/safety mark)
G-A1/4RX60X16MPA/PSI-T 1 T019-400-009-54
(w/safety mark)
5 Oil level gauge Kinoshita Syoten PLG2-60K-M8-S1 1 H0039-0009-05
6 Oil filler port and air breather Masuda MFG. MSA-V30 1 H0032-0015-18
7 Filter Alvania EP Grease 2 Y-443800 (10 μm (400 μin.)) 1 H0032-0015-32
8 Suction filter Alvania EP Grease 2 SF06-100 (100 μm (4,000 μin.)) 1 H0032-0013-76
9 Radiator Taisei Kogyo RA-4 1
(Drain cooler)
10 Level switch Yodogawa Keiki T-LSN-105-B 1
(Shut off level: 13 L (3.4 gal))
11 Pressure switch Taisei Kogyo SPS-10MPA-R1/4 1
12 Rubber hose ASK SIB70-9-600-4+4 1
Table 4-11
Power supply
Power system : AC 200 V/220 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz,
Control system : DC 24 V
Piston pump
Pressure : 6.5 MPa (943.2 psi)
Delivery : 20 L/min (5.3 gpm) 50 Hz 1,450 min.
24 L/min (6.3 gpm) 60 Hz 1,750 min.
Electric motor
Output : 1.5 kW (2 hp) 4P
Voltage Current
200 V 50 Hz 6.8 A
200 V 60 Hz 6.4 A
220 V 60 Hz 6.0 A
Noise level
70 dB or less (at 1 m (3 ft.))
Mass
67 kg (147 lb) (Excluding hydraulic oil)
Tank capacity
20 L (5.3 gal) (t2.3, t3.2)
Exterior paint color : Tank, terminal box, structural parts
Cool white (urethane)
[Pump, motor, and other purchased parts are in their
original color]
Hydraulic oil : ISO VG32
Table 4-12
6175-E P-100
NOTE IEC Compliance

Motor protection classification IP44
Hydraulic unit terminal box IP54
Table 4-13
6175-E P-101
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600110002
Fig. 4-11

Location no. 1 2 3
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h)
Table 4-14
Note
6175-E P-102
4-2-2. Supplying oil for the APC hydraulic unit (MB-46V(E)/56V/66V only)
(MNTKEY0450)
The APC hydraulic unit is located in the right rear of the machine on MB-46V(E)/56V, or in the
middle of the right side of the APC unit on MB-66V.
ME12013R1200600130001
Fig. 4-12

Table 4-15
6175-E P-103
[Supplement]
1) For adjustment of the hydraulic unit, refer to the separate [PURCHASED UNIT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL].
2) A warning is issued when the oil level drops, and this is an ALARM-C warning that will disrupt
operation. Always check the oil level before beginning work.
Maintenance
interval
Drain port
ME12013R1200600130002
Fig. 4-13

Location no. 1 2 3
Symbol
Inspection (h) 50 8
Replenish (h)
Table 4-16
Note
6175-E P-104
4-2-3. Supplying oil for the oil-air lubrication unit (MNTKEY0540)
(1) (2)
(3)
ME12013R1200600140001
Fig. 4-14
1 Oil-air lubrication unit 3 Oil level gauge

2 Oil filler port
Specified oil Mobil DTE Oil Light

Replenish When filled to effective tank capacity, the oil should last approximately 5
months. However, this may vary depending on operating conditions.
Filter cleaning interval The pump filter in the tank should be cleaned every 6 months and
replaced once a year.
Table 4-17
Always use the designated lubrication oil, and fill to the H-level with clean new oil. Make sure no
foreign particles gets into the tank when feeding oil.
Use of lubrication oil other than those designated may result in serious damage to the spindle.
[Supplement]
1) Check the oil level every morning when starting operation. If the oil level drops to the L-level,
low oil ALARM-C is triggered and the machine stops. Therefore, supply oil before the alarm
lamp lights up.
2) For other precautions regarding oil-air lubrication, refer to the precautions provided in
[SECTION 6, 6-7-1. Spindle lubrication (oil-air)]. For details on the instrument, refer to the
separate [PURCHASED UNIT INSTRUCTION MANUAL].
6175-E P-105
4-2-4. Supplying oil for the spindlehead cooling unit (MNTKEY0511)
MB-46V(E)/56V/66V/56V-AW, MF-46V, MU-400V II
(1) Spindle cooling unit for No.40, 8,000 min-1, No.50, 6,000 min-1
AKZ329M060A (DAIKIN)
(2) Spindle cooling unit for No.40, 15,000 min-1, 20,000 min-1, 25,000 min-1, 35,000 min-1, No.50,
12,000 min-1
AKZ439M060A (DAIKIN)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(6)
ME12013R1200600150001
Fig. 4-15
1 Exhaust 5 Tank
2 Control panel 6 Coolant level gauge
3 Air filter 7 Drain port
Slightly lift to remove.
4 Oil filler port
6175-E P-106
Specified oil FC2 (e.g.: Mobil Velocite Oil No.3)

Tank capacity 15 L (4 gal)
Table 4-18
1) If cooling oil other than the specified one is used, cooling efficiency could be lowered.
2) When supplying or replenishing cooling oil, make sure to cut off the power.
3) The control temperature setting is set to be synchronized with the machine temperature ±0 °C
(±0 °F). Do not change the set temperature. (Control panel)
4) Clean the filter at regular intervals (every month). If the filter is clogged, it could cause alarm
and stop the machine.
6175-E P-107
4-2-5. Supplying oil for the hydraulic unit for bearing pretension
(MNTKEY0523)
The hydraulic unit for bearing pretension located on the left side panel of the machine is filled with oil
at the factory before shipment, so it should not need addition oil.
However, oil level may decrease due to worn seals, etc., so check the tank and replenish it if
necessary.

Oil change interval Check every 2,000 hours (Replenish if oil level is low.)
Table 4-19
2000
1000
Maintenance 200
interval 100
50
8
ME12013R1200600170001
Fig. 4-16
6175-E P-108
Lubrication points Pretension switching unit Lubricator 1

Location no. 1 2 3 4
Symbol
Inspection (h) 8 8
Replenish (h) 2,000 100
Clean / Replace (h)
Maintenance item
Replace (h)
Lubrication oil symbol HM32 Mobil DTE Oil Light
Tank capacity (L (gal)) 4.0 (1.06) 1.0 (0.26)
Table 4-20
1 In-rotation blow-through-spindle lubricator specification (optional)
Note
Never remove the tubing on the hydraulic unit for bearing pretension.
The mixing of air into the tubing can cause serious damage to the spindle bearing.
6175-E P-109
4-2-6. Greasing ball screws, linear guide, and ATC (magazine) (except
MB-66V) (MNTKEY0421)
Applying grease using a grease gun (standard specification)

 MB-46V(E), MF-46V, MU-400V II
Grease is applied to the X-, Y-, and Z-axes ball screws, X-, Y-, and Z-axes linear guides, and
ATC (magazine) centrally at a single point from the grease feed terminals at the back of the
machine.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ME12013R1200600180001
Fig. 4-17
1 ATC magazine 3 X- and Z-axes linear guides, X-axis ball screw

2 Z-axis ball screw 4 Y-axis linear guide, Y-axis ball screw
Lubrication points Designated grease Grease quantity

Z-axis ball screw 2 mL
X- and Z-axes linear guides, X- 18 mL (1.8 mL x 8 + 3.6 mL)
axis ball screw
THK AFJ GREASE
Y-axis linear guide, Y-axis ball 10 mL (1.8 mL x 4 + 2.8 mL)
screw
ATC magazine 6 mL
Table 4-21
6175-E P-110
 MB-56V
Grease nipples are installed at lubrication points as shown below and grease is fed into each
ball screw or linear guide through a distributor.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ME12013R1200600180002
Fig. 4-18
1 Z-axis ball screw 3 X- and Z-axes linear guides, X-axis ball screw
2 ATC magazine 4 Y-axis linear guide, Y-axis ball screw

Z-axis ball screw 2 mL
axis ball screw
THK AFJ GREASE
screw
ATC magazine 6 mL
Table 4-22
6175-E P-111
 MB-56V-AW
Grease nipples are installed at lubrication points as shown below and grease is fed into the ATC
magazine through a distributor.
(1)
ME12013R1200600180003
Fig. 4-19
1 ATC magazine

ATC magazine THK AFJ GREASE 6 mL
Table 4-23
6175-E P-112
Grease is applied to the X-, Y-, and Z-axes ball screws and the X-, Y-, and Z-axes linear guides
centrally at a single point from the grease feed terminals at the back of the machine.
ME12013R1200600180004
Fig. 4-20
1 X- and Z-axes linear guides, X- and Z-axes ball screw 2 Y-axis linear guide, Y-axis ball screw

and Z-axes ball screw
THK AFJ GREASE
screw
Table 4-24
6175-E P-113
1) Grease feeding procedure for X-, Y-, Z-axes linear guides and ball screws.
Move each axis while feeding grease.
 Apply grease every 200 hours by the following method.
 Grease can be applied efficiently when the machine is running continuously in MDI or
PROGRAM.
 Move each axis in cutting feed (G01) at F600 mm/min (23.62 ipm).
 Travel distance for each axis should be, X-axis: 250 mm (9.84 in.), Y-axis: 300 mm (11.81
in.), and Z-axis: 320 mm (12.6 in.).
 Perform 1 stroke with the above travel distance.
 While the machine is performing 1 stroke, use the grease gun to feed grease at a constant
pace (at even intervals.)
2) Precautions on the above procedure:
a) Ensure safe operation as greasing is performed while each axis is in motion.
b) Always use THK AFJ GREASE grease.
Using types of grease other than those specified may shorten the life of the linear guide or
ball screw, or may affect machine precision.
[Supplement]
When using the standard accessory grease gun 2-way grease gun LUBE 99, attach the nozzles
provided.
(Grease gun specification)
 Discharging pressure: Max. 41 MPa (5,949 psi)
 Discharge amount: 0.9 mL/stroke
 Capacity: 400 g
 Mass: 1.38 kg (3.04 lb) (body only)
6175-E P-114
Installing the grease cartridge
Procedure :
1- Attach the nozzle to the top of the body by screwing it in.
2- Remove the tube from the body.
3- Pull the chain at the end of the tube and put it on the stopper to lock it.
4- Load the grease cartridge into the body of the gun.
5- Reinstall the tube onto the body and remove the chain from the stopper.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
ME12013R1200600180005
Fig. 4-21
1 Screw on the nozzle. 5 Pull the chain and lock it.

2 Nozzle 6 Load the grease cartridge.
3 Tube 7 Reattach the tube.
4 Remove the tube.
6175-E P-115
Refilling grease manually
Procedure :
1- Attach the nozzle to the top of the body by screwing it in.
2- Remove the tube from the body.
3- Pull the chain at the end of the tube and put it on the stopper to lock it.
4- Use a small spatula or similar utensil to place grease in the tube.

(Be careful not to mix foreign particles or air into the grease.)
5- Attach the tube to the body and remove the chain from the stopper.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
ME12013R1200600180006
Fig. 4-22
1 Screw on the nozzle. 5 Pull the chain and lock it.

2 Nozzle 6 Grease
3 Tube 7 Reattach the tube.
4 Remove the tube.
6175-E P-116
The grease gun comes with a micro-hose accessory that attaches to the grease nipples.
Refer to the [Coupler-type nozzle usage] instructions for correct attachment/removal
method.
Coupler-type nozzle usage
Before Grease Filling

Fit the coupler-nozzle onto the nipple vertically
along the nipple center line.
The nozzle and the nipple are engaged and
locked.
After Grease Filling
Remove the nozzle from the nipple by

slanting it at an angle between 5° and
25°.
Pulling the nozzle vertically may cause
damage to the nipple.
ME12013R1200600180007
Fig. 4-23
6175-E P-117
Manual grease feed using a manual pump (optional) (Standard specification

for MB-66V)
Under this specification, grease is manually applied to the ball screws, linear guides, and ATC
magazine by operating the manual pump at the back of the machine.
(1) (4)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
ME12013R1200600190001
Fig. 4-24
1 Cartridge cover 4 Chain knob

2 Grease cartridge 5 Lever
(Install inside the housing)
3 Discharge port 6 Air outlet port (plug)
Designated grease THK AFJ GREASE

Grease feed amount Once every 50 hours, manually pump 10 times (10 strokes).
(Each stroke of the pump will dispense 1 mL.)
Grease change Cartridge type (400 mL) OKUMA part number: H1104-0000-93
Table 4-25
6175-E P-118
1) Grease supply Information

To ensure that grease is applied evenly to the rotating parts in the linear guides and ball
screws, apply grease while the X-, Y-, and Z-axes are moving.
 Apply grease once every 50 hours by the following method.
 Grease can be applied efficiently when the machine is running continuously in MDI or
PROGRAM.
 Move each axis in cutting feed (G01) at F600 mm/min (23.62 ipm).
 Travel distance for each axis should be, X-axis: 250 mm (9.84 in.), Y-axis: 300 mm (11.81
in.), and Z-axis: 320 mm (12.6 in.).
 Perform 1 stroke with the above travel distance.
2) Precautions on the above procedure:
a) Ensure safe operation as greasing is performed while each axis is in motion.
b) Always use THK AFJ GREASE grease.
Using types of grease other than those specified may shorten the life of the linear guide or
ball screw, or may affect machine precision.
c) Make sure to change the cartridge when the end of the cartridge container is in the low-
level region. Failure to observe this instruction so may allow air to mix in, causing machine
malfunction. When replacing the cartridge, refer to [Replacing the grease cartridge] below
to avoid entry of foreign particles and air.
Feeding grease
Procedure :
1- Initial state
ME12013R1200600190002
Fig. 4-25
 The lever on the grease pump is in the initial state when it is pushed up.
6175-E P-119
2- Pull down the lever on the grease pump slowly.
ME12013R1200600190003
Fig. 4-26
 Grease is fed when the grease pump lever is pulled.

(To prevent damage, do not apply excessive force on the lever when it is in the fully
lowered position.)
 Repeat the up/down motion the required number of times.
3- After the final stroke, fully push up the grease pump lever.
ME12013R1200600190004
Fig. 4-27
 Push in the lever until it is caught in the clip.

When the lever is not fully pushed into the secure position, grease may not be fed
properly due to lack of pressure.
6175-E P-120
Air bleeding procedure

Air bleeding is performed when air enters the manual pump intake, making it impossible to feed
grease.
Procedure :
1- Remove the plug on the air outlet port on the manual pump.
2- Repeat lever push/pull strokes with the plug removed. When an uninterrupted stream (no air
voids) of grease comes out of the port, air removal is complete.
3- Return the lever to the clipped position.
4- Return the plug on the air outlet port.
(1)
ME12013R1200600190005
Fig. 4-28
1 Air outlet port (plug)

6175-E P-121
Automatic grease feeding with an electric pump (optional)
Under this specification, grease is automatically fed to the ball screws, linear guides, and ATC
magazine by operating an electric grease pump at the back of the machine.
(1)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(7)
(3)
ME12013R1200600200001
Fig. 4-29
1 Chain knob 5 Grease cartridge

(Install inside the housing)
2 Motor 6 AIR REMOVAL button
3 Discharge port 7 Outlet check
4 Cartridge cover
Designated grease THK AFJ GREASE

Grease feed amount The pump operates once every 24 hours (of machine operation) and feeds
approximately 7 mL each time.
Grease change Cartridge type (400 mL) OKUMA part number: H1104-0000-93
Table 4-26
6175-E P-122
1) Always use the designated grease.

Using types of grease other than those specified may shorten the life of the linear guide or ball
screw, or may affect machine precision.
2) Make sure to change the cartridge when the end of the cartridge container is in the low-level
region. Failure to observe this instruction so may allow air to mix in, causing machine
malfunction. When replacing the cartridge, refer to [Replacing the grease cartridge] below to
avoid entry of foreign particles and air.
3) When the machine is not operated for an extended period, manually feed grease using the
GREASE SUPPLY flat key and perform run-in operation of the drive axes before full use.
[Supplement]
Check grease balance before starting work everyday. When grease is depleted, [4780 ALARM-D
Grease oil pump error] is triggered. Since this is an ALARM-D, the machine does not stop
immediately. Instead, it keeps running in the ALARM-D state for 200 hours until an ALARM-C is
triggered, at which point the machine stops.
Grease feeding with the GREASE SUPPLY flat key

With the automatic grease feeding system, it is possible to feed grease by manually operating the
electric pump. This function is used for air removal or for run-in operation when the machine was not
operated for an extended period.
Procedure :
1- Operate the electric pump with the GREASE SUPPLY flat key on the NC operation panel.
2- The electric pump stops after 1 minute.
3- The pump also can be stopped in less than 1 minute by pressing the GREASE SUPPLY flat
key again before 1 minute.
[Supplement]
When grease is fed by manual operation of the GREASE SUPPLY flat key, the next automatic
grease feed takes place 24 hours (of actual machine operation) from when the pump last
stopped.
6175-E P-123
Removing air using the AIR REMOVAL button

Perform the following when air enters the pump intake and [4780 ALARM-D Grease oil pump error]
is displayed.
Procedure :
1- Operate the electric pump with the GREASE SUPPLY flat key on the NC operation panel.
2- Press the AIR REMOVAL button located on the electric pump to discharge air together with
grease.
3- When an uninterrupted stream (no air voids) of grease comes out of the discharge port, and
if the [4780 ALARM-D Grease oil pump error] display goes off, air removal is complete.
4- Stop the electric pump by pressing the GREASE SUPPLY flat key on the NC operation panel.
(1)
Air bleed valve
(2)
(3)
ME12013R1200600200002
Fig. 4-30
1 Press -> Discharge 3 Discharge port

2 Release -> Stop
6175-E P-124
Replacing the grease cartridge (manual pump or electrical pump (automatic

grease feed) system)
Procedure :
1- Pull the chain all the way up and latch it on to the top of the cover.
ME12013R1200600210001
Fig. 4-31
In order to remove an empty cartridge from the pump and to load a new one in the cover,
always pull the chain out before performing the task.
2- Manually twist the cover off the pump and remove the used cartridge.
ME12013R1200600210002
Fig. 4-32
6175-E P-125
1) Always use the designated grease.

Using types of grease other than those specified may shorten the life of the linear guide
or ball screw, or may affect machine precision.
2) Never reuse a used cartridge by refilling it with grease. Failure to observe this
instruction may allow air to mix in, causing machine malfunction.
3- Before attaching a new cartridge, squeeze out about 1 cm of grease, as shown in the picture.
(This minimizes the amount of air that enters the pump intake.)
ME12013R1200600210003
Fig. 4-33
4- Attach the cartridge to the cartridge attachment hole by first pushing the squeezed-out
grease into the hole then turning the cartridge clockwise. Be careful not to allow any foreign
particles inside.
5- Re-attach the cover onto the pump and tighten it manually.
6- Pull the chain to unlatch it from the cover, then gently lower it into the cover. The entire chain
should go into the cover.
ME12013R1200600210004
Fig. 4-34
7- Operate the pump to make sure it works normally.

If [4780 ALARM-D Grease oil pump error] is displayed, it is possible that air was mixed in.
(On automatic greasing system only)
(Refer to the above section [Removing air using the AIR REMOVAL button].)
6175-E P-126
Points to check when the alarm is triggered (automatic greasing system)
[4780 ALARM-D Grease oil pump error] is displayed
Is the motor running?

YES -> (1); NO -> Contact OKUMA service.
(1) Does the cartridge have grease in it?

YES -> (2); NO -> (3)
(2) Perform air removal procedure. (Refer to the above section [Removing air using the AIR
REMOVAL button].)
Was the alarm released? YES -> Return to normal; NO -> (4)
(3) Replace the cartridge. (Refer to the above section [Replacing the grease cartridge].)
Was the alarm released? YES -> Return to normal; NO -> (2)
(4) There may be a problem with the Outlet check. (Refer to the above Parts of the pump.)
Contact OKUMA service.
4-2-7. Adding oil to the ATC cam box (MNTKEY0410)

There is no need to add oil at machine installation as the unit is filled with oil at the factory before
shipment. Check the unit every 2,000 hours (every 6 months) to ensure that the oil level is at or
above the middle of the oil level gauge. If the oil level is low, add oil from the oil filler port on the side.
ME12013R1200600230001
Fig. 4-35
Specified oil CKC150

Oil change interval Check every 2,000 hours (Replenish if oil level is low.)
Table 4-27
6175-E P-127
4-2-8. Supplying oil for the tool unclamp package (MNTKEY0240)

The tool unclamp unit located above the spindlehead is filled with oil at the factory before shipment.
However, oil level may decrease due to worn seals, etc. Check the oil level regularly and replenish if
the level is low.
(1)
ME12013R1200600240001
Fig. 4-36
1 Sealing cap with level gauge
Specified oil HM32

Tank capacity 380 mL
Oil change interval Check and refill after 2,000 hours (10 months at 200 hours/month operation)
Table 4-28
6175-E P-128
Checking oil level
Procedure :
1- Remove the sealing cap with level gauge.
2- Wipe the level gauge with a rag.
3- Install the level gauge, then remove it again.
4- Oil level can be checked by checking the mark on the level gauge.
5- Normal oil level is 15 mm (0.59 in.) from the bottom of the cap. If the level falls below this
level, add oil.
15 (0.59)
ME12013R1200600250001
Fig. 4-37
6- Install the level gauge.

6175-E P-129
4-2-9. Supplying oil for the A- and C-axes tables (MU-400V II only)
(MNTKEY0350)
The A- and C-axes tables are driven by hypoid gears and spur wheel gears.
The gearboxes for these gears function as oil tanks, providing oil bath lubrication.
Level of lubrication can greatly affect the life of these gears. Make sure to check the oil level once a
week and add oil when the level is low.
(1) (3)
(4)
(2) (5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
ME12013R1200600260001
Fig. 4-38
1 C-axis gearbox level gauge 7 C-axis hypoid gear filler port

2 C-axis gearbox filler port 8 C-axis hypoid gear drain port
3 A-axis hypoid gear filler port 9 C-axis hypoid gear level gauge (When A-axis is at 0
degree)
4 A-axis hypoid gear level gauge 10 A-axis hypoid gear drain port
5 A-axis gearbox filler port 11 C-axis hypoid gear level gauge (When A-axis is at 90
degrees)
6 A-axis gearbox level gauge
Specified oil CKC220 + extreme-pressure additive

Tank capacity Total 9.1 L (2.4 gal)
Oil change interval Check and refill after 2,000 hours (10 months at 200 hours/month operation)
Table 4-29
6175-E P-130
 On hypoid gears, both the designated oil and extreme-pressure additives must be used.
Without extreme-pressure additives, gears can wear out faster.
Specified extreme-pressure additive
PROLONG Anti-friction metal treatment
Anti-Friction Metal Treatment 10 % to 15 % added
 To ensure stable operation of the C-axis, perform the operation cycle under the following
conditions.
Once a week or more:
 A-axis angle within -60 degrees to -110 degrees, and
 Move the C-axis at a speed of 10 min-1 or less for a minimum of 5 minutes
If the above conditions are included in the machining program, it is not necessary to
perform this operation cycle.
6175-E P-131
4-2-10.Adding oil to the lubricator (optional)

Fill the lubricator of the air filter for the air blower with the specified lubricating oil.
If the lubricating oil in the lubricator is not sufficient, it will cause rusting.

Tank capacity 0.085 L (0.0225 gal)
Check the oil level every day and replenish whenever necessary.
Table 4-30
Supply the specified lubricating oil from the filler port on the lubricator after releasing the air
pressure while the machine is stopped.
6175-E P-132
4-3. Maintenance and inspection of HSK tool clamping unit

(optional)
4-3-1. Greasing the clamping unit (MNTKEY0210)

Due to the construction, the HSK tool clamping unit operates under friction.
Therefore, if friction force that prevents normal operation of the clamping unit parts is generated, tool
clamping error will take place.
Periodically apply grease to the clamping unit to ensure stable operation over the long run.
Procedure :
1- Unclamp the clamping unit by manual operation and remove the tool.
2- Set the clamping unit in the clamp state, as illustrated below, and spray one shot of grease to
each gap from the position where the nozzle tip is located 3 mm (0.12 in.) to 5 mm (0.2 in.)
inside the gap between fingers.
3- Use grease TESCO METAFLUX Metal anti-seize spray 70-81 supplied with the machine or
equivalent product.
4- Greasing interval 1 - 2 times per month.
(1)
(3)
(2)
ME12013R1200600290001
Fig. 4-39
6175-E P-133
1 Finger 3 Finger
2 TESCO METAFLUX Metal anti-seize spray 70-81
(H1104-0000-78)
6175-E P-134
4-3-2. Inspecting the packing used in the clamping unit (MNTKEY0211)

The coolant supply port to the HSK tool incorporates a U-packing. When this U-packing wears,
coolant may leak and deteriorate the spindle functions.
To ensure stable operation over the long run, inspect and replace the U-packing at regular intervals.
Although the wear developing speed may vary with the machine operating conditions, inspect the
packing 1 or 2 times a month, and replace it whenever wear is observed.
The U-packing is a consumable part. Replace it every 1 year of machine operation (or when ATC
operation cycle reaches 500,000 times, whichever is shorter).
Procedure :
1- Unclamp the clamping unit by manual operation and remove the tool.
2- Remove the U-packing using a flathead screwdriver.
3- Attach a new packing by hand.
Note
Do no reuse the removed packing.
Early coolant leak may occur due to scratches.
U-packing
ME12013R1200600300001
Fig. 4-40
6175-E P-135
When placing an order with OKUMA for U-packing, provide the following information:
[HSK-A63]
Part no. : F119-0002-51
Part name : Oil seal
Model number : Fukuda Corporation C1-1028V3664 VITON for HSK-A63
[HSK-A100]
Part no. : F119-0002-60
Part name : Oil seal
Model number : Fukuda Corporation C1-1053V3664 VITON for HSK-A100
6175-E P-136
4-4. Coolant
4-4-1. Coolant tank

The coolant tank is located at the backside of the machine.
MB-46V(E)/56V, MU-400V II
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
ME12013R1200600330001
Fig. 4-41
1 Chip pan 5 Filter

2 Coolant nozzle pump 250 W 6 Pump for workpiece flushing gun (OP) 250 W
3 Chip flushing coolant pump 400 W 7 Oil level gauge
4 Shower coolant pump (OP) 250 W 8 Filter
6175-E P-137
MB-66V
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(5)
(8)
(9)
(10)
ME12013R1200600340001
Fig. 4-42
1 Chip pan 6 Chip pan cover

2 Chip flushing coolant pump 750 W 7 Filters (x2)
3 Pump for workpiece flushing gun (OP) 250 W 8 Shower coolant pump (OP) 550 W
4 Suction pump for through-spindle coolant tank (OP) 9 Filters (x2)
250 W
5 Coolant nozzle pump 390 W 10 Level gauge
6175-E P-138
4-4-2. Classification of (Water-soluble) coolant performance

Reference material: One-point Lessons on the Machining Process (Taiga Shuppan)
The role of coolant is classified into the primary performance that is directly needed in metal cutting
and the secondary performance that is indirectly needed but plays important roles.
Among the above characteristics, determine which characteristics should take priority over the
others.
Primary performance
(1) Lowers the temperature at the cutting edge to reduce tool wear.
(2) Prevents melted chips from sticking to the cutting edge or building up on the edge to improve
the machined surface roughness and stabilize the dimensional accuracy.
(3) Reduces the cutting resistance and cools down the cutting system to prevent the system from
being deformed by thermal deviation.
Secondary performance
(1) Chemically reacts with the cut surface or coated surface to prevent corrosion or discoloration.
(2) Prevents generation of smoke or fire.
(3) Harmless to human body.
(4) Prevents fume generation, prevents the coolant from getting sticky or rotten or deteriorating.
(5) Easy to dispose of.
JIS-specified water-soluble coolant
Class Type Main ingredients Application

W1 Emulsion Mineral oil, detergent, corrosion/rust Cutting or grinding various alloy
(No.1 to 3) preventive compound, antifoam steels and nonferrous alloy
agent
W2 Soluble Detergent, corrosion/rust preventive Light cutting or grinding
(No.1 to 3) compound
Table 4-31
This coolant has excellent penetration and cooling characteristics, and is frequently used for
grinding. One is the emulsion type (W type 1) coolant which is emulsified to a white milk-like liquid
when diluted with water. The other is the soluble type (W type 2) coolant that becomes semi-
transparent or transparent when diluted with water, and is effective for its penetration and cooling
characteristics, making it a popular coolant for grinding.
Soluble type includes detergent as a main ingredient and features excellent penetrating, cooling and
washing effects and suitable for light cutting and grinding. In addition, resistance against rotting is
stronger than the emulsion type. But due to its excellent washing ability, it may dissolve the
lubricating oil mixed with the coolant and damage the coating.
Select the coolant while keeping it in mind that there is no such coolant that satisfies both primary
and secondary performances, for example, the coolant which prolongs tool life in light cutting and
heavy cutting, assures accurate machined surface, and can be easily disposed of.
6175-E P-139
Use only the water-soluble coolant recommended by OKUMA. Note that the water-soluble
coolant of soluble type (W type 2) other than listed above may damage the coating. Also avoid
using the chemical solution coolant because it damages not only the coating but also the
slideways where chemical reaction with the lubricating oil tends to occur, and the rubber parts
such as sealing material may also be damaged.
6175-E P-140
4-5. Chip pan (except MB-56V-AW)
4-5-1. Chip pan configuration
MB-46V(E)/56V, MU-400V II
ME12013R1200600440001
Fig. 4-43
Chips discharged from the chip conveyor are collected in this chip pan.
(1) The chip pan capacity is about 60 L (15.9 gal) (MB-46V(E)). (69 L (18.2 gal) for MB-56V; 70 L
(18.5 gal) for MF-46V, MB-66V)
(2) Perforated sheet metal is built into the bottom of the chip pan so that coolant can be returned to
the coolant tank from the bottom of the chip pan.
(3) Normally a cover is provided for this chip pan to prevent coolant from splashing. Remove the
cover, inspect, and clean the chip pan whenever necessary.
6175-E P-141
MB-66V
ME12013R1200600450001
Fig. 4-44
Chips discharged from the chip conveyor are collected in this chip pan.
(1) The chip pan capacity is about 92 L (24.3 gal).
(2) Perforated sheet metal is built into the bottom of the chip pan so that coolant can be returned to
the coolant tank from the bottom of the chip pan.
(3) Normally a cover is provided for this chip pan to prevent coolant from splashing. Remove the
cover, inspect, and clean the chip pan whenever necessary.
6175-E P-142
4-6. Coolant unit (drum filter type chip conveyor system)

(optional for MF-46V)
4-6-1. Specifications
Coolant pump specification
Items Model number

Coolant tank capacity 600 L (158.5 gal) (Effective 250 L (66.1 gal))
Coolant type Water-soluble coolant
Pump motor capacity and discharge amount Grundfos SPK4-8/3
200 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
370 W
40 L/min (10.6 gpm)
No. of coolant nozzles x5 (angle adjustable)
Table 4-32
 Refer to [SECTION 4, 4-4. Coolant] for details on coolant.
The machine is coated with two-liquid paint consisting of polyurethane compound base and
curing agent.
Use emulsion type (W type 1) water-soluble coolants.
Do not use water-soluble type coolants (W type 2) as they may damage the painted surface.
Tank filter specification
Items Model number

Filter type RDIII-124A-N
Workpiece material Aluminum, steel (curly type 100 mm (3.94 in.) or less)
Coolant Water-soluble
Volume supplied to machine 350 L/min (92.5 gpm)
Geared motor GFM28-600-T60A (Nissei Kogyo)
Volume supplied for washing belt 60 L/min (15.9 gpm) x 1 kgf/cm2 (0.098 MPa)
Washing pump SPK4-8/3, 0.18 kW (0.24 hp)/0.3 kW (0.4 hp) (Grundfos)
Rated current: 1.92 A (50 Hz)/1.82 A (60 Hz)
Filtering accuracy 30 μm (1,200 μin.) (No.200)
Dirty tank 220 L (58.1 gal)
Clean tank 380 L (100.4 gal)
Coolant level gauge AP-1 (Koho Kosan)
Power supply AC200 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Table 4-33
 Refer to [PURCHASED UNIT INSTRUCTION MANUAL] for details on coolant tank.
6175-E P-143
Cleaning
For details, refer to the [MOSNIC’s R-DIII Coolant Filter in the Purchased Unit Instruction Manual].
6175-E P-144
4-7. Oil hole holder
No.40 tool
Fig.1 Fig.2
L L C1
L1 D2 L1
H2 H1 H3 H1
G1
D
MT, NO. D
S
D
(1) (5)
(2) h6 (6) h6 28°

(3) Φ18 (0.71) (7) Φ18 (0.71)
(4) (8)
[For Morse Taper type drill] [For Set Screw type drill]
ME12013R1200600510001
Fig. 4-45
1 Oil path 5 Oil path

2 Free length b 6 Free length b
3 Set length a 7 Set length a
4 Positioning pin 8 Positioning pin
Max.
MT. speed Weight
Model number Fig D1 L1 C1 H1 H2 G1 S a b D
no. (kg (lb))
min-1
3.8
BT40-OMT3-120 1 MT3 23.825 120 82 21 22 - 65 6 0 23.5 - 32 3,000
(8.3)
3.4
BT40-OMT4-120 1 MT4 31.267 120 82 21 34 - 65 6 0 33 - 50 3,000
(7.4)
4.8
BT40-OSL16-150 2 - 16 150 82 25 - M12 P1.5 65 6 0 3,000
(10.5)
Varies 4.7
BT40-OSL20-150 2 - 20 150 82 25 - M12 P1.5 65 6 0 depend- 3,000
(10.3)
ing on car-
bide bit 4.6
BT40-OSL25-165 2 - 25 165 82 15 20 M16 P1.5 65 6 0 3,000
maker. (10.1)
5.4
BT40-OSL32-165 2 - 32 165 82 15 20 M16 P1.5 65 6 0 3,000
(11.8)
Table 4-34
6175-E P-145
1) The angle between the positioning pin and the drive key slot should be 28°, as shown above.
2) Positioning and oil delivery blocks are supplied by OKUMA.
3) Specify your machine model number to the tool maker when making a purchase.
4) Pull-stud bolt: MAS-407 Type 2.
5) Purchase an oil hole holder of Daishowa Seiki.
6175-E P-146
No.50 tool
Fig.1 Fig.2
L L C1
L1 L1
D2
H2 H 1 H3 H1
G1
D
D
MT, NO.
S
D
(1) (5)
39°
(2) h6 (6) h6
(3) Φ18 (0.71) (7) Φ18 (0.71)
(4) (8)
[For Morse Taper type drill] [For Set Screw type drill]
ME12013R1200600520001
Fig. 4-46
1 Oil path 5 Oil path

2 Free length b 6 Free length b
3 Set length a 7 Set length a
4 Positioning pin 8 Positioning pin
Max.
MT. speed Weight
Model number Fig D1 L1 C1 H1 H2 G1 S a b D
no. (kg (lb))
min-1
8.0
BT50-OMT3-115 1 MT3 23.825 115 98 21 22 - 80 6 0 23.5 - 32 3,000
(17.6)
7.8
BT50-OMT4-120 1 MT4 31.267 120 98 21 34 - 80 6 0 33 - 50 3,000
(17.1)
7.5
BT50-OMT5-120 1 MT5 44.399 120 98 28 40 - 80 6 0 50.5 -60 3,000
(16.5)
8.2
BT50-OSL16-165 2 - 16 165 98 25 - M12 P1.5 80 6 0 3,000
(18.0)
8.0
BT50-OSL20-165 2 - 20 165 98 25 - M12 P1.5 80 6 0 3,000
Varies (17.6)
depend-
10.2
BT50-OSL25-165 2 - 25 165 98 15 20 M16 P1.5 80 6 0 ing on car- 3,000
(22.4)
bide bit
maker. 10.2
BT50-OSL32-165 2 - 32 165 98 15 20 M16 P1.5 80 6 0 3,000
(22.4)
8.0
BT50-OSL40-165 2 - 40 165 98 15 25 M16 P1.5 80 6 0 3,000
(17.6)
Table 4-35
6175-E P-147
1) The angle between the positioning pin and the drive key slot should be 39°, as shown above.
2) Positioning and oil delivery blocks are supplied by OKUMA.
3) Specify your machine model number to the tool maker when making a purchase.
4) Pull-stud bolt: MAS-403 Type 2.
5) Purchase an oil hole holder of Daishowa Seiki.
6) The spring pressure of positioning pin should be 100 N (23 lbf) or lower. (When the positioning
pin consists of two springs or more, the total of the springs pressure should be 100 N (23 lbf)
or lower.)
6175-E P-148
SECTION 5 OPERATION
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-1. Operation panels
ME12013R1200700010001
Fig. 5-1
6175-E P-149
SECTION 5 OPERATION
MG.MANUAL
MANUAL INT.
O I
INDEX START
CW CCW
DOOR INTERLOCK
RESTART
EMG.STOP
ME12013R1200700010002
Fig. 5-2
6175-E P-150
SECTION 5 OPERATION
SW1 (Stroke end release switch)
ME12013R1200700010003
MF unit within the control box: On MF-EC1 board

Fig. 5-3
ME12013R1200700010004
Left door on the control box

Fig. 5-4
6175-E P-151
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-2. Before starting operation
5-2-1. General checks

 Check the lubricating oil level every day before starting operation.
 Always use the OKUMA recommended and specified brands of lubricating oil.
 For coolant, use the OKUMA specified coolant.
 It is recommended to use a water-soluble coolant to prevent fire. Do not attempt unmanned

operation when non-water-soluble (oil-based) coolant is used.
 Change and replenish the lubricating oil and coolant in each reservoir regularly according to the
manual.
 Clean the filters regularly according to the manual.
 Check that each pressure gauge on the air and hydraulic lines displays correct value as
described in this manual.
 Always turn off the power before beginning any work inside the front shield. In addition, turn off
the power before beginning work at the back of the machine that requires an operator to enter
the machine operating zone.
 When the front door is locked with the power turned off, the safety door switch mechanically
locks the door. The door can be opened as described in [SECTION 2, 2-4-3. Door lock
releasing in emergency].
5-2-2. Before turning on the power

 Make sure that the doors to the operation panel and the control box are closed.
 Make sure that there are no obstacles around the machine.
 Turn on the main switch before turning on the control on the operation panel.
 Make sure that no person is inside the machinery.
 Make sure that hydraulic and pneumatic piping are connected correctly.
6175-E P-152
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-2-3. Precautions during manual operation and continuous operation

 Always follow the instructions in the operation manual.
 Always make sure that all of the protective covers including the front cover are in place before
operating the machine.
 Always close the front door before starting operation.
 When processing the first product, check operations and interference between parts thoroughly
by performing idling -> cutting of a single block -> continuous operation in order.
 Ensure safety before spindle rotation, workpiece clamping and axis movement.
 Never touch chips or the workpiece while the spindle is rotating.
 Never attempt to stop a moving object by hand or with a tool.
 Check the jig installation conditions, all hydraulic pressures, and the maximum allowable
spindle speed.
 Check the installation and arrangement of the tools.
 Check the tool offset settings.
 Check the zero offset settings.
 Check that both the SPINDLE OVERRIDE and the FEED RATE switches on the NC control
panel are at 100 %.
 Check the software limit setting positions for the X-, Y-, Z-, and A-axes (in case of MU-type
machining center).
 Make sure the cutting operation is within the allowable transmission power and torque ranges.
 Make sure that the workpiece and tool are securely fitted in the clamping unit or jig.
 Check the cutting fluid nozzle positions.
Bring the machine to a complete stop by turning off the main switch
before operations such as setup or adjustments inside the chip guard
are carried out. Also turn off the main switch before working inside the
machine at the rear side of the machine.
6175-E P-153
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-2-4. Spindle precautions

 When removing chips adhering to the spindle or around the spindle, do not blow air or coolant
on the spindle. The scattered chips or dust may enter the spindle and damage the bearings.
When cleaning the spindle unit, use a broom or waste cloth.
 When cleaning the spindle tapered bore, use the supplied cleaning bar or clean waste cloth.
 If the power is turned off, the air supply to the spindle inside is cut off. Dust particles may get in
the spindle and cause damage to the bearings. When the internal space of the machine is
dusty, air supply to the inside of the spindle may be shut off. This may cause dust to get into the
spindle, resulting in damage to the bearings. Therefore, don't turn off the power or implement
emergency stop operation unless a true emergency arises.
5-2-5. Tool precautions
Never use unbalanced tools. Tool could strike through the front cover.
The use of unbalanced tools is highly dangerous, and may result in death or serious injury when
tools strike through the front cover or safety window glass.
The following precautions must be taken for safe operation.
1) Do not rotate the spindle exceeding the allowable speed of the tool. Otherwise, the tool could
be broken with fragments flying out of the machine causing serious injury to operators.
Consult the tool manufacturer for the allowable speed of the tool to be used.
2) During high-speed operation, there is a danger that a broken tool could fly out of the machine.
Therefore, the full-enclosure shielding must always be kept closed during high-speed
operation.
3) Do not use a tool that uses replaceable inserts, etc. which could fly out during spindle rotation
due to centrifugal force. If a replaceable insert flies out during operation, it could cause serious
injury to operators.
4) Use only tools that are dynamically balanced.
5) Use of unbalanced tools is strictly prohibited.
6) Special care must be taken when using big-bore tools and boring bars. If vibration is caused
during high-speed spindle rotation, stop the spindle immediately.
Continuous rotation of the spindle can cause breakage of the tool and impact of fragments
of the broken tool on the front shield of the machine, resulting in serious injury.
When a poorly balanced tool is rotated at speeds exceeding 3,000 min-1, it can create abnormal
vibrations to the spindle drive system, leading to potential damage to the bearings. Use of
unbalanced tools are also dangerous to the machine operator. Especially when using a big-bore tool
or boring bar, ensure that the tool is well-balanced.
For high-speed operation, consult the tool manufacturer to select the appropriate tool.
During high-speed cutting, chips or broken tool fragments might fly off the machine.
Strictly observe the safety precautions such as "Do not stand in front of the rotating parts".
6175-E P-154
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-2-6. Things to remember during set-up and configuration

 Make sure that setup is complete.
 If the setup is changed, operate the machine step-by-step to make sure that cutting can be
performed without any problems.
 Before changing the clamping unit or jig, make sure that it fits the intended job.
 If two or more workers must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate.
 Use the crane or equivalent tool to handle heavy objects.
 when attempting an unfamiliar setup, double check the setup before operation.
5-2-7. Workpiece loading and unloading

 Make sure that workpieces are loaded and unloaded securely.
 Before loading or unloading a workpiece, retract the spindlehead so that the cutting tools in the
turret cannot injure the operator.
 Before loading and unloading a workpiece, make sure that the spindle has come to a complete
stop.
 Before running a new program, rotate the spindle to make sure that the tool is securely clamped
in the holder.
 Before machining an irregularly-shaped workpiece, make sure that it is balanced properly.
 When handling heavy workpieces, use a crane, hoist, or other similar tool.
 Before loading a workpiece, make sure that the workpiece has a portion that can be used for
proper clamping.
6175-E P-155
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-2-8. Dry and minimum quantity machining (MQL)
Dry machining can cause fire.

Make sure to exercise safety precautions to avoid fire.
Hazards due to gases and vapors

Oil mists are harmful to health and may contain cancer-causing
substances. Do not inhale oil mist!
Operate machines with suction systems only when the suction is
working.
Harmful gases and vapors may escape when protective devices are
opened. Ensure adequate ventilation or exhaust.
 Dry machining is a fire hazard because workpiece, tool, or chips are not cooled. Therefore,
never place any flammable objects near the machine and dispose of chips and do not allow
them to stack up.
 In machines for dry machining, the tools are cooled with oiled air. These machines are designed
for machining at the currently standard cutting speeds. There is a possibility of sparks or
burning chips being formed during machining.
 The air volume exchange is designed for normal operating conditions.
 Ensure that no explosive mixtures with air are formed from the machining operation.
 Machines designed for dry machining must never be used for machining magnesium materials.
 Thoroughly clean the machine and the filter system each time before you change the material
to be machined.
 Machines that are designed only for dry machining must never be used for machining using
cooling lubricants.
6175-E P-156
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-2-9. When a problem occurs

The following procedure should be performed:
 Check the NC program.
 Check the Alarm Message which is displayed on the first line of the operation panel.
 Consult the person in charge of maintenance to determine what corrective measures need to
be taken. Make sure to consult any specially trained and skilled personnel who are authorised
for this purpose. Clearly assign responsibility of operation, service, and maintenance of the
machine to individuals, and follow instructions from the responsible individual.
 If two or more workers must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate.
Shut off the machine's main breaker while servicing the machine.
Secure the main breaker against unauthorised activation by locking it.
6175-E P-157
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-3. Manual operation, preparatory operation

For safe operation, safety devices such as door interlocks are provided as standard equipment.
Before operating the machine, read the separately provided [OSP-P300S/P300M OPERATION
MANUAL] and [SAFETY DOOR INTERLOCK FUNCTION MANUAL].
5-3-1. Power ON/OFF
Procedure :
1- Turn the power switch of the circuit breaker, located on the side of the NC control box, to the
right so it is in the ON position in order to supply power to the NC unit.
ON (1)
OFF (0)
ME12013R1200700120001
Fig. 5-5
1) If power is not supplied, check the factory power supply switch.

2) The pumps for the NC cooler, hydraulic unit, and spindlehead lubrication unit start.
Check the pressure for each unit.
6175-E P-158
SECTION 5 OPERATION
2- Press the CONTROL ON push button switch on the NC operation panel.
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200700120002
Fig. 5-6
1 CONTROL ON push button switch 2 CONTROL OFF push button switch

The switch lights up. All operational power is shut off.
If the CONTROL ON push button switch is not illuminated, it means one of the EMG.
STOP push button switches is likely in the hold position. Check and reset it.
3- Set the NC PANEL key-controlled selection switch on the NC control panel to the UNLOCK
position. The screen and the indicating lights on the panel will be turned on.
ME12013R1200700120003
Fig. 5-7
6175-E P-159
SECTION 5 OPERATION
4- When shutting off the power during normal operation, first press the CONTROL OFF push
button switch on the left of the NC operation panel. (For an emergency stop, press the EMG.
STOP push button switch.)
Then turn the main power switch on the side of the NC control box to the OFF position on
the left.
As described above, each of the machine units is active until the

power is shut off with the power supply lever. Use caution as they
may move unexpectedly.
[Supplement]
After turning the power on, perform routine inspections and adjustments per [SECTION 6,
6-3. Periodical inspection schedule] before beginning work.
6175-E P-160
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-3-2. Emergency stop
ME12013R1200700130001
Fig. 5-8
NC operation panel EMG. STOP push button switch

ATC operation panel EMG. STOP push button switch
APC operation panel EMG. STOP push button switch
Table 5-1
To perform an emergency stop during MANUAL, AUTO, or MDI operation, press the red EMG.
STOP push button switch on the operation panel shown above. Control power will be shut off and
the machine will stop immediately.
1) Pressing the EMG. STOP push button switch shuts off power to the
control systems, but beware that power is still supplied to the non-
fuse breaker.
2) Engaging emergency stop operation while the spindle is rotating may
not stop the spindle rotation immediately due to its rotational inertia.
To avoid being caught in spinning tools, do not approach them until
they come to a full stop.
To restore power to the control system after an emergency stop, first remove the cause of
malfunction, next turn the EMG. STOP push button switch clockwise to reset it, then press the
CONTROL ON push button switch.
6175-E P-161
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-3-3. Hand turning the spindle (spindle running idle)
ME12013R1200700140001
Fig. 5-9
It is often necessary to rotate the spindle slightly while the spindle is at a standstill, for example, for
alignment of a cutting tool to the workpiece, manual removal and setting of a cutting tool from and to
the spindle, and inspection of cutting bits. For this, press the spindle RELEASE flat key on the NC
operation panel. The spindle drive system will be set to neutral, allowing easy hand turning of the
spindle.
Operating conditions
 Control power is ON.
 Spindle is at a standstill.
 The spindle tool is not unclamped.
 Machine is not in the ATC cycle.
 MANUAL mode is selected on the NC operation panel.
When working with the spindle running idle, take care that no other
operator will inadvertently engage the spindle. Failure to observe this
instruction may result in being caught in the spindle.
[Supplement]
To restart the spindle after it has been running idle enter a spindle speed command.
6175-E P-162
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-3-4. Spindle indexing (position stopping of the spindle)

Spindle indexing is performed to index and clamp the spindle to a certain position to prepare for tool
changes.
Spindle rotation is done by the spindle drive motor.
 Control power is ON.

(In AUTO or MDI mode, spindle orientation is possible using the M19 command.)
 Tool is clamped in the spindle.
 The ATC tool change arm is not at the spindlehead.
Operating method
(1) (2)
ME12013R1200700180001
Fig. 5-10
1 The lamp should be ON. 2 The lamp will light up.

6175-E P-163
SECTION 5 OPERATION
(1) Press the spindle ORIENTATION flat key while holding down the INTERLOCK RELEASE flat
key in NC operation.
(2) To reset the spindle indexing mode, rotate or idle the spindle.
 To rotate the spindle (clockwise or counterclockwise), press either CW or CCW flat key
while holding down the INTERLOCK RELEASE flat key in NC operation.
 To release the spindle, press the spindle RELEASE flat key.
Never touch the spindle while it is in the spindle indexing mode. Failure
to observe this instruction may result in being caught in the machine.
The spindle should be indexed during clockwise rotation. The spindle stops at the first indexed
position, basically. However, it might rotate two or three times before stopping.
Never apply a rotating torque to the spindle right after completion of

spindle indexing, for example by tightening the milling chuck, because
of the following dangers.
 Torque may be generated in the opposite direction to return to the
indexed position.
 An alarm error may occur.
 Power may be shut off, causing a free state.
ME12013R1200700180002
6175-E P-164
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-3-5. Clamping and unclamping the tool in spindle

Tools can be clamped/unclamped by pressing the pushbutton switch in order to manually remove
tools attached to the spindle during ATC auto changes or to manually attach/remove tools to/from
the spindle which cannot be handled by the ATC magazine.
A time-saving pull stud mechanism is used to draw the tool into the spindle. The pull stud, located at
the rear of the toolholder, is drawn into the spindle by a collet and a belleville spring housed in the
spindle.
To remove a tool, a hydraulic cylinder at the top of the spindlehead opens the collet, which is held
closed by spring force, and pushes the tool out of the spindle. This tool push-out stroke is about 1
mm (0.04 in.).
 Use tools which conform to machine specifications and which match the figure of the pull stud
and tape shank shown in the [Separate volume technical sheet].
 The spindle is at a standstill. The spindlehead may be in any position. Position it closer to the
operator.
Operating method
MANUAL TOOL CHANGE
TOOL CLAMP
TOOL UNCLAMP
ME12013R1200700210001
Spindlehead operation panel (MB-46V(E)/56V, MF-46V, MB-56V-AW, MU-400V II)

Fig. 5-11
6175-E P-165
SECTION 5 OPERATION
MANUAL TOOL CHANGE

MANUAL TOOL CHANGE TOOL CLAMP TOOL UNCLAMP
ME12013R1200700210002
Spindlehead operation panel (MB-66V, MU-400V II (optional))

Fig. 5-12
Press the MANUAL TOOL CHANGE push button switch on the spindlehead operation panel.
To prevent accidentally pressing the TOOL UNCLAMP push button switch and dropping the tool
from the spindle, the TOOL CLAMP and TOOL UNCLAMP push button switch are disabled until
they are enabled by expressly pressing the MANUAL TOOL CHANGE push button switch.
 Tool Removal
While holding the tool by hand, press the TOOL UNCLAMP push button switch. After three
seconds, the tool in the spindle will be unclamped and can then be removed from the spindle. A
time-delay of three seconds is built into the tool unclamp operation to allow the operator to hold
a heavy tool with both hands after pressing the button.
 Tool Installation
Insert another tool into the spindle, align the drive key, then press the TOOL CLAMP push
button. The tool will be clamped in the spindle.
 When the optional through-spindle coolant configuration is used, the through pin pushes out the
pull stud by another 10 mm (0.39 in.). (Refer to [SECTION 9, 9-4-6. Procedure to change
through pin in the pulling shaft].)
1) Clean the spindle nose and tool shank tapers before setting a tool in the spindle.
2) If a tool has been used for a long time or heavy cutting operation, it may become heated and
difficult to remove from the spindle. Care should be taken while handling a hot tool.
Continuous heavily vibrating cutting may cause rust to form among the spindle taper hole tools
due to fretting corrosion symptoms. Apply a coating of powder lubricant such as aerosol
molybdenum disulfide to the taper section. (Refer to [SECTION 5, 5-3-6. Reference
information on [MOLYKOTE 321]].)
However, lubricant oil film is formed within the inner diameter of spindle taper and the tool
edge position slightly changes when it is not applied. So, take this into consideration when
performing finish machining that requires precise machining accuracy.
Also, when lubricant is applied to the 2-flat fixing tools (such as BIG PLUS or HSK), please be
aware that the contact pressure between the tool and the spindle end face may be reduced.
6175-E P-166
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-3-6. Reference information on [MOLYKOTE 321]
Data sheet
®
MOLYKOTE D-321R dry coating grease
Grease type Air dry type

Components Binder Inorganic compound
Solid lubricant M0S2 + graphite
Solvent (diluted) Mineral Spirit
Color Dark gray
Optimal application Spraying ○
method Dipping ○
Tumbling ○
Brushing ○
Set to touch (at 25 °C (77 °F)) 3 min.
Curing conditions Leaving the grease for 30 minutes at room
temperature
Greasing area (10 μm (400 μin.) film) 20 m2/L
Working temperature range -180 °C (-292 °F) to 450 °C (842 °F) (650 °C (1,202
°F) in inactive atmosphere)
Storage life Bulk: 1 year, Aerosol: 2 years
Flash point 23 °C (73 °F)
Falex test 1 Abrasion resistance life 75 min.
Withstand load 1,136.4 kg (2,500.1 lb)
LFW-1 test2 Abrasion resistance life 460,000 cycles
Abrasion resistance life 250,000 cycles
against reciprocating
movements
Adhesive property 3 Good
5 % salt water spray test 4 2 hours
Applicable standards Fourth group, Second class petroleum
Features Low friction coefficient
Noncombustible
Radiation resistant
Easy to use
Use Cold forging
Replacement with other dry coating
Preventing nibbling of bolts
Fitting of parts
Volume Aerosol 233 mL
Bulk 1 L (0.3 gal), 4 L (1.1 gal)
Table 5-2
6175-E P-167
SECTION 5 OPERATION
Test conditions (test conditions for tests 1 through 4 in the MOLYKOTE 321
datasheet.)
The test pieces are sandblasted and coated with grease sprayed to a thickness of 10 μm (400 μin.).
Falex abrasion resistance life Load 4,450 N (1,001 lbf)

(Federal standard 791-3807) Speed 290 min-1
1
Falex withstand load Load increasing amount 1,110 N/min
(Federal standard 791-3812) Speed 290 min-1
LFW-1 abrasion resistance Load 2,800 N (630 lbf)
life Speed 72 min-1
Ring hardness HRC60
Block hardness HRC60
Kinematic friction Time measured until the
coefficient for judgment coefficient reach 0.1
2
LFW-1 abrasion resistance Reciprocating cycle 87.5 min-1
life against reciprocating Rotation angle 90°
movements
Ring hardness HRC60
Block hardness HRC60
Kinematic friction Time measured until the
coefficient for judgment coefficient reach 0.1
Adhesive property Pressure sensitive tape test
3
(Federal standard 791-3810)
5 % salt water spray test 5 % salt water
4 (Federal standard 791-4001) 35 °C (95 °F) continuously
Table 5-3
6175-E P-168
SECTION 5 OPERATION
Greasing method
Grease can be applied by spraying, dipping, or brushing.

Solids in MOLYKOTE® D-321R dry coating grease can deposit over time. Provide sufficient agitation
before use. Usually, cover the grease container to prevent the binder from hydrolyzing and the
solvent from evaporating.
It is desirable to use MOLYKOTE® D-321R dry coating grease without dilution. However, the solvent
can evaporate over time. If it is necessary to adjust viscosity, do so with Mineral Spirit.
Spraying
Use a general spray gun. When spraying, ventilate the room and use it in the same way as general
spraying. At this time, do not forget to stir up the grease sufficiently. By a single stroke of spraying, 5
μm (200 μin.) to 7.6 μm (304 μin.) thick film is formed; thereby optimum adhesive property and
abrasion resistance life can be obtained.
Dipping
Stir up the grease sufficiently before use because solid material in the grease tends to precipitate. It
is recommended to use an automatic stirrer.
Brushing
Apply grease by brushing when there is no other choice. Use a normal brush for painting.
Curing method
MOLYKOTE ® D-321R dry coating grease hardens with the moisture in the air. In the normal state
(at 21 °C (70 °F) with relative humidity of 50 %), the grease cures within 30 minutes. The curing time
will be shortened with increase in temperature or humidity.
Make sure to read the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) before use.
When using MOLYKOTE® D-321R, handle it in a well-ventilated place and avoid breathing its
vapor for an extended period. Since the vapor stimulates your eyes or mucous membrane, wear
protective devices whenever necessary. After greasing, wash your hands. Do not directly apply
grease to any hot parts. When storing the grease, seal the grease container and keep it in a cool
dark place.
6175-E P-169
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-4. When starting the machine

Check the air pressure and oil levels. Warm-up operation is not normally required for machine with
6,000 min-1, 8,000 min-1 spindle. However, when the temperature is very low in winter, perform
warm-up operation at 3,000 min-1 for 10 minutes.
Before operating the high-speed spindle model, conduct the warm-up run according to the table
below.
12,000 min-1 spindle model 15,000 min-1 spindle model 20,000 min-1 spindle model
3,000 min-1 10 min. 4,000 min-1 10 min. 5,000 min-1 5 min.
6,000 min -1 10 min. 9,000 min -1 10 min. 10,000 min -1 10 min.
15,000 min-1 10 min.
25,000 min-1 spindle model 35,000 min-1 spindle model

5,000 min-1 20 min. 2,000 min-1 5 min.
20,000 min -1 15 min. 5,000 min -1 5 min.
10,000 min-1 5 min.
15,000 min-1 5 min.
20,000 min-1 5 min.
25,000 min-1 5 min.
30,000 min -1 5 min.
35,000 min -1 5 min.
Table 5-4
6175-E P-170
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-5. Spindle speed selection
5-5-1. Spindle speed selection

(1) The machine is not equipped with controls for manually selecting the spindle speed.
(2) With an AUTO or MDI command, S4-digit direct commands from the NC controller changes the
spindle speed automatically.
(3) A graph showing the relationship between spindle speed, torque, and output is provided in
[SECTION 5, 5-5-2. Spindle speed - spindle power/torque diagrams].
(4) The table below shows the spindle speed ranges and full-power ranges of each spindle
specification.
MB-46V(E)/56V/66V, MF-46V, MB-56V-AW, MU-400V II

Spindle taper no. 40
Spindle specifications 8,000 15,000 20,000 25,000
Speed range min-1 50 to 8,000 50 to 15,000 50 to 20,000 50 to 25,000
Spindle spec- Spindle output kW (hp) 22/18.5 (30/
ifications 11/7.5 (15/10) (10 30/22 (40/30) (10 15/11 (20/15) (10
24.67) (10 min./
min./cont.) min./cont.) min./cont.)
cont.)
Maximum spindle torque N-m (lbf-ft) 198.1 (146.2) 199 (146) 57 (42) 29.1 (21.4)
-1 530 to 8,000 4,000 to 15,000 5,000 to 20,000 20,000 to 25,000
Constant output range min
Spindle taper no. 40 50

Spindle specifications 35,000 6,000 12,000
-1 50 to 35,000 50 to 6,000 50 to 12,000
Speed range min
Spindle spec- Spindle output kW (hp) 26/18.5 (34.7/
ifications 11/7.5 (15/10) (10
15 (20) (Cont.) 24.67) (10 min./
min./cont.)
cont.)
Maximum spindle torque N-m (lbf-ft) 4.09 (3.01) 198.1 (146.2) 199 (146)
Constant output range min-1 - 530 to 6,000 4,000 to 12,000
Table 5-5
6175-E P-171
SECTION 5 OPERATION
(5) Use the SPINDLE OVERRIDE(%) switches to set spindle speed within the range of 30 % to 200
%.
Changing this override dial setting during spindle rotation is effective. However, the override dial
setting is ineffective if the resultant spindle speed exceeds the specified spindle speed range.
(2) (4)
(1) (3)
ME12013R1200700310001
Fig. 5-13
1 SLOWER flat key 3 FASTER flat key

Spindle speed decreases by 10 % or 1 % every time Spindle speed increases by 10 % or 1 % every time
pressed. pressed.
2 Spindle override display 4 Switch the unit of the spindle override amount to be
increased/decreased to 10% or 1%.
* For details about spindle override, see the separate volume of [OSP-P300S/P300M
OPERATION MANUAL].
If the specified speed command value is the minimum speed or the maximum speed or higher,
the spindle remains stopped and an alarm occurs. (However, if such a command is specified
during spindle rotation, the spindle keeps rotating.)
6175-E P-172
SECTION 5 OPERATION
 Do not rotate the spindle exceeding the allowable maximum speed of

the mounted tool.
The tool may fly out of the machine causing serious injury. For the
allowable tool rotation speed, check with the tool maker.
 The SPINDLE OVERRIDE switch is always enabled. If you set it to a
value higher than 100 %, the spindle speed selected by the next
speed command is also increased by the dial-selected rate.
Make it a rule to return the dial to 100 % or lower rate immediately
after a cutting cycle is finished.
 Even if power is shut off when the spindle is spinning, it continues to
spin due to inertia. To avoid being caught by the spinning spindle, do
not approach it until it comes to a complete stop.
 Check the allowable spindle speed for a tool to be used. Specify
allowable spindle speed for each tool on the tool information setting
screen.
 Do not set a speed that exceeds the specified allowable spindle
speed for a tool. If you do so and a command is issued for a speed
over the tool's allowable spindle speed, a tool, a holder, or chips may
fly out causing death or serious injury to passers-by.
 Do not perform milling under conditions where the speed of the tool
tip is 1,000 m/min (3,281 fpm) or faster.
This is extremely dangerous as the tool may be broken and its
pieces dispersed, causing death or serious injury to passers-by.
If such milling conditions are unavoidable, take safety measures
such as placing covers around the area.
 Do not rotate a gun drill tool without the tool being inserted in a guide
hole. This is extremely dangerous as the tool may be broken and its
pieces dispersed, causing death or serious injury to passers-by.
 Do not operate the machine with the operation door left opened or
with an operator standing inside the plastic chain. There is a risk of
entanglement in rotating parts or broken tool pieces being dispersed,
causing death or serious injury.
6175-E P-173
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-5-2. Spindle speed - spindle power/torque diagrams
8,000 min-1 (No.40) specification
When setting the cutting conditions, take into account the following values for spindle torque and
output.
 Maximum spindle torque : 198.1 N-m (146.2 lbf-ft)
 Maximum spindle output 11 kW/7.5 kW (15 hp/10 hp), 10 min./cont.
The spindle's full-power range is from 530 min-1 to 8,000 min-1.
300 30
198.1 N-m (146.2 lbf-ft) (5 min.) 11 kW (15 hp) (5 min.)
200 20
135.1 N-m (99.7 lbf-ft) (cont.)
11 kW (15 hp) (10 min.)
100 10
7.5 kW (10 hp) (cont.)
50 5
Spindle torque N-m (lbf-ft)
Motor output kW (hp)

30 3
20 2
10 1
530 1200
10 50 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 8000

Spindle speed min-1
ME12013R1200700320001
Fig. 5-14
6175-E P-174
SECTION 5 OPERATION
output.
 Maximum spindle torque : 199 N-m (147 lbf-ft)
 Maximum spindle output 22 kW/18.5 kW (30 hp/24.67 hp), 10 min./cont.
The spindle's full-power range is from 4,000 min-1 to 15,000 min-1.
300 30
22 kW (30 hp) (10 min.)
199 N-m (147 lbf-ft) (5 min.) 20
200 15 kW (20 hp)
146 N-m (108 lbf-ft) (cont.) (5 min.) 18.5 kW (24.67 hp)
(cont.)

10
100
52 N-m
(38 lbf-ft) 6
60
11 kW (15 hp)
(cont.) 4
44 N-m
40 (32 lbf-ft)
2
20
14 N-m
2,500 (10 lbf-ft)
15,000
1
10
11.8 N-m
(8.7 lbf-ft)
0
50 100 200 400 720 1000 2000 4000 10000
Spindle speed min-1

ME12013R1200700330001
Fig. 5-15
6175-E P-175
SECTION 5 OPERATION
output.
 Maximum spindle output 30 kW/22 kW (40 hp/30 hp), 10 min./cont.
30 kW (40 hp) (10 min.)

30
22 kW (30 hp) (cont.)
300 20
100 10
57 N-m (42 lbf-ft) (10 min.)
42 N-m (31 lbf-ft) (cont.)

50 5
20 2
10 1
5 0.5
50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000

Spindle speed min-1
ME12013R1200700340001
Fig. 5-16
6175-E P-176
SECTION 5 OPERATION
output.
 Maximum spindle output 15 kW/11 kW (20 hp/15 hp), 10 min./cont.
200 15 kW (20 hp) (10 min.) 20

11 kW (15 hp) (10 min.)
100 11 kW (15 hp) 10

7.5 kW (10 hp) (cont.) (cont.)
60 6

40 4
29.1 N-m (21.5 lbf-ft)
25,000
19.9 N-m (14.7 lbf-ft)
20 2
3,600 1
10
0.4
4
50 100 200 400 1000 2000 4000 10000 20000 40000

-1
Spindle speed min
ME12013R1200700350001
Fig. 5-17
6175-E P-177
SECTION 5 OPERATION
output.
 Continuous rating torque : 4.09 N-m (3.02 lbf-ft)
 Continuous rating output 15 kW (20 hp)
Continuous rating torque
4.09 N-m (3.02 lbf-ft)

15 kW (20 hp)
Continuous rating output
Spindle speed min-1

ME12013R1200700380001
Fig. 5-18
6175-E P-178
SECTION 5 OPERATION
output.
 Maximum spindle output 11 kW/7.5 kW (15 hp/10 hp), 10 min./cont.
The spindle's full-power range is from 530 min-1 to 6,000 min-1.
300 30
198.1 N-m (146.2 lbf-ft) (5 min.) 11 kW (15 hp) (5 min.)
200 20
135.1 N-m (99.7 lbf-ft) (cont.)
11 kW (15 hp) (10 min.)
100 10
7.5 kW (10 hp) (cont.)
50 5

30 3
20 2
10 1
3 530
6,000
2 1,200
10 50 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000

Spindle speed min-1
ME12013R1200700360001
Fig. 5-19
6175-E P-179
SECTION 5 OPERATION
output.
 Maximum spindle output 26 kW/18.5 kW (34.7 hp/24.67 hp), 10 min./cont.
199 N-m (147 lbf-ft) (5 min.) 26 kW (34.7 hp) (10 min.) 30

300
20
200 15 kW (20 hp) (5 min.)
11 kW (15 hp) (cont.) 18.5 kW (24.67 hp)

(cont.) 11
146 N-m (108 lbf-ft) (cont.) 10
100

2
2,500
720
1
10 4,000
50 100 1000 2000 3500 12000

Spindle speed min-1
ME12013R1200700370001
Fig. 5-20
6175-E P-180
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-6. Spindle CW, CCW, STOP

 This machine is designed to perform cutting in AUTO or MDI modes rather than in manually
controlled operation. As such, the only manual controls available for spindle rotation are the
CW, CCW, and STOP flat keys. There is no manual control for spindle rotation speed.
 Spindle speed selection can only be made with S commands through the AUTO or MDI mode
commands. Refer to [SECTION 5, 5-5. Spindle speed selection] in this section.
5-6-1. Operating conditions

 Control circuit power must be ON.
 MANUAL mode is selected on the NC operation panel. However, even during AUTO mode, if
operation is paused or MANUAL INT. is ON, manual operation is possible.
 Tool is clamped in the spindle.
 The ATC tool change arm is at the standby position.
 An S command has been given to control the spindle speed.

If the specified speed command value is the minimum speed or the maximum speed or higher,
the spindle remains stopped and an alarm occurs.
5-6-2. Operating method
ME12013R1200700410001
Fig. 5-21
(1) To rotate the spindle (clockwise or counterclockwise), press either the CW or CCW flat keys
while holding down the INTERLOCK RELEASE flat key on the NC operation panel.
(2) To stop the spindle, press the spindle STOP flat key.
(3) Pressing the spindle STOP flat key stops the spindle by applying a motor brake.
6175-E P-181
SECTION 5 OPERATION
1) Switching the NC operation modes does not affect the spindle rotation conditions.
2) Pressing the RESET button on the NC operation panel causes the spindle to stop.
3) If the spindle drive motor load exceeds the motor capacity (150 % is displayed on the CRT as
a load in the constant output range), the spindle will stop.
6175-E P-182
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-7. Feeding the X-, Y-, Z-, A-, and C-axes
Z+ Y+
X+
Z
Axes
A
C
ME12013R1200700420001
Fig. 5-22
The axis nomenclature is indicated below.
Operation +direction
X-axis Spindlehead left/right Right
Y-axis Table front/back Forward
Z-axis Spindlehead up/down Upward
A-axis Tilting by trunnion Tilt forward
C-axis Table rotation Clockwise rotation
Table 5-6
6175-E P-183
SECTION 5 OPERATION

 The flat key of the feed axis to be operated has been selected.
 The axis to be controlled is not located at its travel end.
 The ATC tool change arm is at the standby position.
5-7-2. Rapid feed operation procedure
(1)
(2)
(3)
ME12013R1200700440001
Fig. 5-23
1 Check that the lamp is lit. 3 On the MU-V, this is "C".

2 On the MU-V, this is "A".
Procedure :
1- Select the axis to be moved with a flat key.
2- Select the desired rapid feed rate override percentage, from 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 30, 50, 75, 100 %
by adjusting the RAPID OVERRIDE(%) switch.
This selection can be changed during operation while an axis is moving.
3- By pressing the RAPID+ or RAPID- flat key, the selected axis moves rapidly in the direction
of the flat key pressed for as long as it is pressed, and stops when the key is released.
4- When manual rapid feed of A- or C-axes is performed on the MU-V, movement is performed
at the half the speed of automatic rapid feed. (e.g. A-axis: 20 min-1, C-axis: 25 min-1)
6175-E P-184
SECTION 5 OPERATION
1) On this machine, rapid feed speed is very high at 42 m/min (138 fpm) for X- and Y-axes, 32 m/
min (105 fpm) for Z-axis, 50 min-1 for A-axis, 1 and 50 min-1 for C-axis. Take special care to
avoid collisions caused by misoperations. When unfamiliar with machine operation or to be
extra careful, use the RAPID OVERRIDE switch to reduce speed.
2) Do not operate the X-, Y-, Z-, A-, and C-axes continuously in rapid feed for 5 or more minutes
for reasons such as warm-up, or run-in.
This may result in excessive heat generation or early damage to the bearings.
3) When operating the X-, Y-, Z-, A-, and C-axes, be extra careful to avoid interference with the
A-, C-axes table, workpiece, tool, spindle, or spindlehead.
1: A- and C-axes for MU-400VII only.
5-7-3. Running-in operations

Follow the steps below to carry out run-in operation for axis feed.
Procedure :
1- On power up, LUBE PUMP ON is automatically enabled. Feed each axis along their full
travel range for 20 to 30 minutes with RAPID OVERRIDE set to 10 %.
5-7-4. Manual feed operation
(1)
ME12013R1200700460001
Fig. 5-24
1 Check that the lamp is lit.

6175-E P-185
SECTION 5 OPERATION
Procedure :
1- Select the axis to be moved with a flat key.
2- On the JOG SPEED SELECT switch, select the desired feed rate from the range between 0
mm/min and 10,000 mm/min (0 ipm and 393.70 ipm). This selection can be changed during
operation while an axis is moving.
3- By pressing the JOG+ or JOG- flat key, the axis will move in the direction selected by the flat
keys at the selected feed rate.
4- Press the JOG STOP flat key to stop JOG feed.
5- When A-axis or C-axis is selected, feed rate will be the multiple of the set unit. For example,
at a 0.001° set unit, when the + or - flat key is pressed with a 10,000 selection, feed rate is
10°/min in the direction of the flat key selected.
5-7-5. Automatic feed operation

Automatic JOG is performed with AUTO or MDI. For details, refer to the [OSP-P300S/P300M
PROGRAMMING MANUAL].
The feed rate specified from the keyboard or tape input can be changed using FEEDRATE. A
feedrate switch setting of 100 % will maintain the programmed rate as it is, and the speed is
adjustable in 23 stages from 0 % to 200 %.
ME12013R1200700470001
Fig. 5-25
6175-E P-186
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-8. Manual pulse feed

The manual pulse feed operation is effective for feeding an axis a relatively short distance at a low
feedrate, for example such as aligning a cutting tool to a workpiece or manually feeding an axis in a
trial cut.

MANUAL mode is selected on the NC operation panel.
Set PULSE HANDLE MAGNIFICATION switch to any value other than "○".
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200700490001
Fig. 5-26
1 Check that the lamp is lit. 2 The lamp will light up.
6175-E P-187
SECTION 5 OPERATION
[Standard pulse handle] [CE-compliant pulse handle]
(1)
ME12013R1200700490003
Fig. 5-27
1 Pulse handle operation is enabled only while both of these buttons are pressed.
6175-E P-188
SECTION 5 OPERATION
Procedure :
1- Set the desired multiple on the PULSE HANDLE MAGNIFICATION switch. This multiplication
factor multiplies the travel per pulse by 1, 10, or 50 times:
Multiplication factor
Selected axis Pulse unit 1 10 50
X, Y, Z 0.001 mm (0.00004 in.) 0.001 0.01 0.05
A, C 0.001 degrees 0.001 0.01 0.05
0.0001 degrees 0.0001 0.001 0.005
Table 5-7
2- Use the flat key to choose the axis you want to select.
3- Rotate the pulse handle clockwise to feed the axis in the positive (+) direction; rotate it
counterclockwise to feed in the negative (-) direction.
One revolution of the pulse handle dial generates 100 pulses.
The pulse handle unit is removable from the NC operation panel. This facilitates centering
work to be carried out near the workpiece.
0
90
10
80
20
70
30
60
40
50
ME12013R1200700500001
Fig. 5-28
1) An alarm will be activated when the given feedrate exceeds the maximum allowable axis feed
rate. This may result if the pulse handle dial is turned quickly while a high multiplication factor
has been set.
2) If the axis does not move when the pulse handle dial is turned, it may be necessary to adjust
the [set backlash amount].
3) In order to prevent the pulse handle from being moved when accidentally touched, set PULSE
HANDLE MAGNIFICATION switch to "○" when not used and make sure the pulse handle
selection light is off.
6175-E P-189
SECTION 5 OPERATION
(1)
ME12013R1200700500002
Fig. 5-29
1 Make sure that the light is off.

6175-E P-190
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-9. Coolant unit
5-9-1. Coolant nozzle
Milling spindle
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200700520001
Fig. 5-30
1 Cock 2 Coolant nozzle (x5)

Adjustable coolant system
a. There are a total of 5 coolant nozzles. (Right of spindle)
b. Flexible nozzles are used for the coolant nozzle, making it easy to set the desired angle.
c. Set each of the 5 nozzles at a different angle so the coolant is discharged to different locations.
This eliminates the need to re-adjust the nozzles each time the tool is changed.
6175-E P-191
SECTION 5 OPERATION
1) For selection of coolant, consult its maker since some types of coolant may damage or
abnormally rust packings or wipers.
2) Be careful not to get the nozzle caught in the ATC tool change arm.
6175-E P-192
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-9-2. Coolant operation
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200700540001
Fig. 5-31
1 MACHINE OPERATION flat key 2 COOLANT button
When MACHINE OPERATION flat key is pressed, LED light on the upper left of the key is turned on
and a machine operation related screen is open. On the button on the right of the screen, when
COOLANT button is pressed, [COOLANT] operation screen is displayed. When MACHINE
OPERATION flat key is pressed again, the machine operation related screen is closed and LED light
on the upper left of the key is turned off.
(1) In the case of MANUAL

Press MACHINE OPERATION flat key on the operation board to display [COOLANT] operation
screen.
Coolant is discharged and stopped by pressing the function key.
(2) Program entry command and keyboard entry command

Codes to be used
M08 Coolant pump ON
M09 Coolant pump OFF
Table 5-8
To use program entry operation, enter the above M code into the program.
In keyboard operation, enter the above M-code from the keyboard and press the CYCLE
START push button switch.
a. The coolant pump's ON setting is changed to OFF with the following commands:
M00, M01, M02, M30, M50, M51
6175-E P-193
SECTION 5 OPERATION
b. The coolant pump is turned on/off by the operation of the function key or the M codes,
whichever given later.
For example, if the coolant pump is set to ON due to an M code command, it can be turned
off by pressing the function key. The same is true for the reverse case.
c. Coolant flow rate can be adjusted with an adjusting screw located near each nozzle.
Although coolant flow can be shut off by completely closing the adjusting screws while the
coolant pump is operating, it could cause coolant temperature to rise and the pump to be
damaged. Therefore, they should not be closed fully while the coolant pump is operating.
6175-E P-194
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-10. Chip conveyor
5-10-1.Chip conveyor (Chip flushing system)
MB-46V(E)/56V/66V, MF-46V, MU-400V II
(1)
(Front of machine)
(Back of machine)
(2) (3)
(4)
ME12013R1200700220001
Fig. 5-32
1 Table 3 Chip pan

2 Bed 4 Coolant tank
A chip flushing system is provided on the left and right side of the bed.
Coolant and chips from the table are discharged to the rear of the machine by the coolant in the
flushing gutter, and the chips are collected in the chip pan.
The coolant returns to the coolant tank from the bottom of the chip pan.
Chip flushing is turned ON and OFF by pressing the CHIP ON/OFF flat key on the NC operation
panel.
[Supplement]
 To prevent the system from being clogged with chips, leave coolant flushing at all times during
operation.
 Discharging a large amount of chips into the gutter at once, during setup for example, may
cause the chips to clog the gutter. If this occurs, it is necessary to remove the clogged chips
manually using a stick, for example.
6175-E P-195
SECTION 5 OPERATION
MB-56V-AW
(1)
(Front of machine)
(Back of machine)
(3)
(2)
(4)
ME12013R1200700550001
Fig. 5-33
1 Table 3 External conveyor

A chip flushing system is provided on the left and right side of the bed.
Coolant and chips from the table are discharged to the front of the machine by the coolant in the
flushing gutter and the chips are collected in the external conveyor.
The coolant returns to the coolant tank from the side of the external conveyor.
Chip flushing is turned ON and OFF by pressing the CHIP ON/OFF flat key on the NC operation
panel.
[Supplement]
 To prevent the system from being clogged with chips, leave coolant flushing at all times during
operation.
 Discharging a large amount of chips into the gutter at once, during setup for example, may
cause the chips to clog the gutter. If this occurs, it is necessary to remove the clogged chips
manually using a stick, for example.
6175-E P-196
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-10-2.Chip conveyor (coil screw type) (optional) (except MB-56V-AW)
(Front of machine) (Back of machine)
(1) (2)
(3)
ME12013R1200700560001
Fig. 5-34

2 Chip pan
A coil-screw chip conveyor is located on the left and right of the table.
Coolant and chips from the table are discharged to the rear of the machine by the conveyor, and
chips are collected in the chip pan. The coolant returns to the coolant tank from the bottom of the
chip pan.
ME12013R1200700560002
Fig. 5-35
1 CHIP CONVEYOR flat key
The chip conveyor is turned ON and OFF by pressing the CHIP CONVEYOR flat key on the NC
operation panel.
1) To prevent the system from being clogged with chips, leave coolant flushing continuously to
smoothly discharge chips.
2) Opening the full-enclosure shielding will cause the chip conveyor to stop for safety.
3) Long chips generated by drilling and small and long fibrous chips are not suitable for the
conveyance. Cut chips short by step feeding or similar operation.
4) When cleaning the inside of the machine, dropping excessive amounts of chips on the chip
conveyor at once may result in the chips clogging the conveyor and stopping it. Remove the
chips a little at a time.
6175-E P-197
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-11. Panel light

ON and OFF are switched by pressing flat keys on the NC operation panel.
ME12013R1200700570001
Fig. 5-36
6175-E P-198
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-11-1.Panel light location
ME12013R1200700580001
Fig. 5-37
6175-E P-199
SECTION 5 OPERATION
Fluorescent lighting
□ MB-46V (E) / 56V / 56V-AW, MU-400V II

1 Lighting system (optional) 2 Lighting system (standard specification)
AW536DBG+AW560 AW536DBG+AW560
AC100V 50 Hz/60 Hz 36W AC100V 50 Hz/60 Hz 36W
Installed inside the left side full-enclosure shielding. Located behind the operation panel inside the full-enclosure
shielding.
Fluorescent lamp : DULUX-L36W 4000K (OSRAM) Fluorescent lamp : DULUX-L36W 4000K (OSRAM)
Rated life : 9,000 hours Rated life : 9,000 hours
OKUMA part number : E3534-905-002 OKUMA part number : E3534-905-002
Table 5-9
□ MB-66V
1 Lighting system (standard specification) 2 Lighting system (standard specification)
AW536DBG+AW560 AW536DBG+AW560
shielding.
Fluorescent lamp : DULUX-L36W 4000K (OSRAM) Fluorescent lamp : DULUX-L36W 4000K (OSRAM)
Table 5-10
LED panel light
□ MB-46V (E) / 56V / 56V-AW, MU-400V II

1 Lighting system (optional) 2 Lighting system (standard specification)
LF1D-FH2F-2W-451-01 LF1D-FH2F-2W-451-01
DC24V 50 Hz/60 Hz 12.5W DC24V 50 Hz/60 Hz 12.5W
shielding.
Life expectancy: 50,000h [25°C (77°F), 70% dimming] Life expectancy: 50,000h [25°C (77°F), 70% dimming]
Table 5-11
□ MB-66V
LF1D-FH2F-2W-451-01 LF1D-FH2F-2W-451-01
shielding.
Life expectancy: 50,000h [25°C (77°F), 70% dimming] Life expectancy: 50,000h [25°C (77°F), 70% dimming]
Table 5-12
6175-E P-200
SECTION 5 OPERATION
MF-46V
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200700610001
Fig. 5-38
Fluorescent lighting
1 Lighting system (standard specification) 2 Lighting system (optional)

AW536DBG+AW560 JF-W18DB
shielding.
Fluorescent lamp : DULUX-L36W 4000K (OSRAM) Fluorescent lamp : FPL18EX-N 18W

Table 5-13
LED panel light

LF1D-FH2F-2W-451-01 LF1D-FH2F-2W-451-01
Placed inside of the overall cover ceiling. Located behind the operation panel inside the full-enclosure
shielding.
Life expectancy: 50,000h [25°C (77°F), 70% dimming]
Life expectancy: 50,000h [25°C (77°F), 70% dimming]
Table 5-14
6175-E P-201
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-12. Oil mist coolant supply system (with air blow circuit)
(optional)
(1) Mist spray unit
(5)
(1)
(6)
(2)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(12)
ME12013R1200700650001
Fig. 5-39
1 Power cord entry (G1/2) 7 Mist oil (Rc1/4)

Mist air (Rc1/4)
Air blow (Rc1/4)
2 Air source pressure (Rc1/4) 8 Manual mist spray button
3 Drain port (Rc1/4) 9 Pressure adjustment dial
4 Coolant tank (capacity 3 L (0.8 gal)) 10 Pressure gauge (air pressure)
5 Manual air blow button 11 Pressure gauge (tank)
6 Oil filler port 12 Oil level gauge
This oil mist coolant tank is located on the air panel at the back of the machine.
6175-E P-202
SECTION 5 OPERATION
(2) Flexible Extension Nozzle Jet
Standard jet tip
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200700650002
Fig. 5-40
1 Oil adjusting needle 2 Air adjustment needle
The flexible hose can be bent freely and therefore you can apply coolant mist to any point
desired.
(3) The following M signal are used to control the oil mist coolant system:
M07 Oil Mist Coolant System ON
M09 Oil Mist Coolant System OFF
Table 5-15
(4) To replenish the tank with coolant, turn off the machine and the air supply to the machine and
remove the filling port.
6175-E P-203
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-13. Nozzle chip air blower

(1) Attach flexible extension nozzle to the spindlehead as shown in the following figure and turn
ON/OFF the air blower with M signal.
M12 Chip Air Blower ON
M09 Chip Air Blower OFF
Table 5-16
(2) The flexible nozzle is approximately 78 mm (3.07 in.) long from the end of the spindlehead
nose. (Approximately 70 mm (2.76 in.) from the end of the spindlehead.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Approx. 80 (3.15)
Workpiece
ME12013R1200700660001
Fig. 5-41
1 Air solenoid valve 3 Nozzle with cock

2 Air source pressure
Note
The air source is supplied by the customer. (Air pressure: 0.5 MPa (72.6 psi) to 0.7 MPa (101.6
psi))
6175-E P-204
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-14. Operation end lamp, buzzer and auto power shutoff lamp
(1) Lamps
a. Operation end lamp (yellow)

Lights up when M00, M01, M02, M30, or END is executed.
Also, for machines equipped with APC, this light goes on if the APC SETUP COMPLETE
button is not pressed when M60 is executed.
b. Alarm lamp (red)

Lights up when an NC alarm or EC alarm occurs.
c. The operation end lamp or alarm lamp goes out when the RESET push button switch on
the NC operation panel is pressed.
(2) Operation end buzzer
a. The buzzer sounds for a preset time under the same conditions as lighting of the operation
end lamp.
b. The end buzzer and the end lamp can be actuated together.
(3) Auto power shutoff function
a. The power is shut off when the programmed M02, M30, or END is executed.
b. For machines with APC, power is shut OFF if the APC SETUP COMPLETE button is not
pressed when M60 is executed.
(4) The above function can be enabled/disabled using the PARAMETER key.
(Refer to the [OSP-P300S/P300M OPERATION MANUAL].)
6175-E P-205
SECTION 5 OPERATION
5-14-1.Display lamp location
MB-46V(E)/56V/66V/56V-AW, MU-400V II
ME12013R1200700690001
Fig. 5-42
1 3-step status indicator lamp (signal tower)

Patlite
LS7-302DWG-RYG (LED type)
Lamp life: Approximately 40,000 hours
(Red, yellow, green from the top.)
OKUMA part number: E3550-284-011
6175-E P-206
SECTION 5 OPERATION
MF-46V
(1)
ME12013R1200700700001
Fig. 5-43
1 3-step status indicator lamp

Patlite
LS7-302DWG-RYG (LED type)
Lamp life: Approximately 40,000 hours
(Red, yellow, green from the top.)
OKUMA part number: E3550-284-011
6175-E P-207
SECTION 6 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS
SECTION 6 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND

ADJUSTMENTS
The machine should only be operated and serviced by personnel trained and authorised for this purpose.
Designate a responsible party for operation, service, and maintenance of the machine and follow the
instructions from such responsible party.
The following steps should be done:
 Clean the machine.
 Before entering the machine, remove the M-spindle tool.
 Turn off the control switch before turning off the main power disconnect switch.
 Make sure all power switches are turned off.

Shut off the machine's main breaker while servicing the machine.
Lock the main breaker to ensure that the power is not inadvertently
turned back on.
Note the 4 safety rules before the work.
 Switch off.
 Lock the main breaker to ensure that the power is not inadvertently
turned back on.
 Even with the main breaker turned off, electrical potential may still be
left in the MCS drive unit (for axes and spindle), so no one except
service personnel should touch these units.
 Adjacent energized parts should be covered or fenced off. Parts in the
switch cabinet can be energized when the main switch is deactivated.
These parts are specially marked!
Electricity is flowing through components in the electrical system even if

the main switch is turned OFF.
When service personnel are inside the machine, the safety door may not
be reopened.
The safety door can be closed without electricity flowing, but to open it, the
machine control switch must be turned ON.
Check that the door is not inadvertently closed.
The inside of the machine is slippery with coolant and oil. Be cautious as to
where you stand and take precautions such as using a rubber mat.
Be careful with the tool or workpiece attached to the machine. There is a

risk of injury.
6175-E P-208
Maintenance inspection of this machine may be performed only by personnel thoroughly familiar with
machine operation and properly trained in maintenance inspection.
If maintenance inspection is performed by individuals without such proper skills, they may not be able to
properly handle any accidents that may occur during maintenance work, resulting in serious injury or death.
Also, improper maintenance work may result in detrimental impact on the machine or its accuracy.
OKUMA assumes no responsibility, and extends no product warranty related to accidents or damage to the
machine that may occur as a result of failure to observe these instructions.
6-1. General information

Maintenance and repair work may be performed only by persons specially trained for the type of
work involved.
The setting, maintenance and inspection work and the intervals for replacing operating materials
and worn parts specified in these operating instructions must be observed!
Inform the operating staff before beginning special work and maintenance. Appoint the supervisory
staff!
When replacing large subassemblies, carefully fasten them to the lifting gear and make sure they
are secure.
When performing installation work above head-height, use climbing aids and working platforms
which are intended for such purpose or designed to ensure safety.
Do not use machine parts as climbing aids! When performing maintenance in high places, take
measures to prevent objects from falling.
Keep all handles, treads, railings, pedestals, platforms and ladders free from dirt and lubricants!
Secure sufficient work space and protective equipment necessary for maintenance work.
After finishing maintenance and repair work, always tighten the loosened screw fittings!
If you disassemble the protective cover or safety unit as part of the maintenance work, reassemble
them as soon as maintenance and repair work is complete. Upon reassembly of these covers and
units, confirm that they are functioning normally.
6-2. Cleaning agents

Do not use any cleaning agents which could damage resin, seals or paint (e.g. agents containing
alcohol or solvents). These can damage hoses (hydraulic, pneumatic), cables, seals and other resin
parts.
Cleaning agents can contain health-damaging substances. Keep in mind instructions from the
cleaning agent manufacturer.
Do not use compressed air for cleaning.
We recommend cleaning the entire machine once a week, or more frequently if it is prone to getting
dirty sooner.
Never use alcohol-containing cleaning agents for cleaning the polycarbonate window of the
front shield.
6175-E P-209
6-3. Periodical inspection schedule
6-3-1. Periodical inspection schedule
MB-46V(E)
Interval Inspection items Check point Check

Every day (1) Check air source pressure (0.5 MPa (72.6 psi)). Air panel
(2) Check and replenish the lubricator (optional). Air panel
(3) Check and replenish the oil-air lubrication unit. Air panel
(4) Check and replenish the coolant tank level. Coolant tank
(5) Clean the spindle tapered bore. Spindle
(6) Remove chips and clean. Chip pan in the machine
(7) Check hydraulic unit (optional) pressure (source: 6.5 MPa (943.2 psi)). Hydraulic unit
(8) Check cartridge grease level. Air panel
(Manual pump and electric pump system)
Weekly (1) Check and replenish the spindlehead cooling unit. Rear side
(2) Clean the coolant tank filter. Coolant tank
(3) If equipped with a through-spindle coolant supply unit (separate tank type) Separate through-
(optional), check and replace the prefilter. spindle coolant tank
(4) Check the hydraulic (optional) unit oil level. Hydraulic unit
(5) Feed grease to the ball screw, linear guide, and ATC (Manual pump grease feed Air panel
system).
Biweekly (1) Clean the air filter on the spindlehead cooling unit. Rear side
(2) Clean the air filter on the suppressing thermal deviation unit (optional). Right side
1 month (1) Check the machine for levelness. Bed
Only for the first
(2) Change oil in the spindlehead cooling unit. Rear side
month after
installation (3) Clean the coolant tank. Coolant tank
(4) Change oil in the hydraulic unit (optional). Hydraulic unit
1 month (1) Feed grease to the ball screw and linear guide. Rear side
(Standard specification)
(2) Inspecting the bellows cover Bellows cover
(3) Inspecting the telescopic cover wiper Telescopic cover
(4) Grease the HSK tool clamping unit (optional). Spindle
3 months (1) Check the machine for levelness. Bed
(2) Clean the coolant tank. Coolant tank
6 months (1) Change oil in the spindlehead cooling unit. Rear side
(2) Feed grease into the ATC. Rear side
(3) Inspect and lubricate the ATC cam box. ATC
(4) Check the plastic bowl for the air filter, regulator, and lubricator (optional). Air panel
(5) Clean the filter in the oil air lubrication unit. Rear side
(6) If equipped with a through-spindle coolant supply unit (optional), check and Spindle
replace the seal for the through pin.
(optional), clean its tank. spindle coolant tank
1-year (1) Check lubrication of the spindle unclamp package. Spindlehead
(2) Adjust the tension of the ATC magazine. ATC
(3) Adjust chain tension on the coil screw type conveyor (optional). Front
(4) Replace the filter in the oil air lubrication unit. Rear side
(5) Change oil and clean or replace filter on the hydraulic unit (optional). Hydraulic unit
(6) If equipped with a through-spindle coolant supply unit (optional), check and replace Spindle (HSK tool)
the U-packing of the HSK clamp unit.
2-year (1) Replace the safety window glass for operation door. Operation door
Table 6-1
6175-E P-210
MB-56V

(8) Check cartridge grease level and replace if necessary. Air panel
system).
Only for the first
month after
1 month (1) Feed grease to the ball screw and linear guide. Front
(2) Feed grease into the ATC. Front
(6) If equipped with a through-spindle coolant supply unit (optional), check and replace Spindle
the seal for the through pin.
Table 6-2
6175-E P-211
MB-66V

(8) Check cartridge grease level and replace if necessary. Air panel
(5) Feed grease to ball screw, linear guide, and ATC. Rear side
(2) Clean the air filter on the suppressing thermal deviation unit (optional). Left and right side
Only for the first
month after
1 month (1) Inspecting the bellows cover Bellows cover
Table 6-3
6175-E P-212
MF-46V

Every day (1) Check hydraulic unit pressure (source: 6.5 MPa (943.2 psi)). Hydraulic unit
(2) Check air source pressure (0.5 MPa (72.6 psi)). Air panel
(7) Remove chips and clean. Inside machine, bucket
(8) Check drum filter for clogging. Drum filter type chip
conveyor
Weekly (1) Check oil level in the hydraulic unit. Hydraulic unit
(2) Check and replenish the spindlehead cooling unit. Rear side
(4) If equipped with a through-spindle coolant supply unit (integrated into coolant Coolant tank
tank type) (optional), check and replace the line filter.
(5) If equipped with a through-spindle coolant supply unit (separate tank type) Separate through-spindle
(optional), check and replace the prefilter. coolant tank
system).
Only for the first
(2) Change oil in the hydraulic unit. Hydraulic unit
month after
installation (3) Change oil in the spindlehead cooling unit. Rear side
(6) Check timing belt for APC. Below APC setup station
(8) If equipped with a through-spindle coolant supply unit (separate tank type) Separate through-spindle
(optional), clean its tank. coolant tank
(2) Change oil in the hydraulic unit and clean or change the oil filter. Hydraulic unit
Table 6-4
6175-E P-213
MB-56V-AW

(7) Check hydraulic unit pressure (source: 6.5 MPa (943.2 psi)). Hydraulic unit
Only for the first
month after
1 month (1) Feed grease to the ball screw and linear guide. Front
(2) Feed grease into the ATC. Front
Table 6-5
6175-E P-214
MU-400V II

(7) Check hydraulic unit pressure (source: 6.5 MPa (943.2 psi)). Hydraulic unit
Weekly (1) Check and replenish lubricant oil for the A-, C-axes table. A-, C-axes table
(2) Perform C-axis lubrication cycle A-, C-axes table
(3) Check hydraulic unit oil level. Hydraulic unit
(4) Check and replenish the spindlehead cooling unit. Rear side
(5) Clean coolant tank filter. Coolant tank
system).
Only for the first
month after
(5) Change oil and clean or replace filter on hydraulic unit. Hydraulic unit
(6) Replace lubrication oil on A-, C-axes table. A-, C-axes table
Table 6-6
6175-E P-215
6-3-2. Precautions for cleaning the safety window

(1) Use a soft cloth for cleaning.
Do not use a scourer or hard cloth.
(2) Use cold or warm water when removing dirt. If it is difficult to remove dirt, use a neutral
detergent (for example, a kitchen detergent) by diluting it.
(3) Do not use organic solvents, such as thinner and benzene, or strong alkali detergents.
6175-E P-216
6-4. Adjustment of hydraulic unit
6-4-1. Source pressure adjustment and pressure indication (MB-46V(E)/

56V/66V/56V-AW, MF-46V, MU-400V II)
NOTE: For MB-46V(E)/56V/66V only when equipped with APC.
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(7) (8)
(6)
(9)
(10) (11)
ME12013R1200800120001
Fig. 6-1
1 Level switch 7 Hydraulic pump

2 Pressure gauge 8 Motor
3 Oil filler port and air breather 9 Oil level gauge
4 Pressure adjusting screw 10 Drain Rc1/2 (M female/male elbow, round w/plug)
5 Flow regulating screw 11 Filter
6 Terminal box
6175-E P-217
Air source setting pressure 6.5 MPa (943.2 psi)
Table 6-7
The pressure gauge is located on the front of the hydraulic unit.
Note
1) When it is necessary to adjust source pressure, turn the pressure adjustment screw on the
vane pump.
Clockwise turning → Pressure increases
Counterclockwise turning → Pressure decreases
2) When it is necessary to adjust flow rate, turn the flow regulating screw on the vane pump.
Clockwise turning → Discharge decreases
Counterclockwise turning → Discharge increases
3) For details on the hydraulic unit, refer to the [HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT INSTRUCTION
MANUAL] supplied separately.
6175-E P-218
6-5. Adjusting air equipment
6-5-1. Adjusting air equipment (MNTKEY0531)
MB-46V(E)/66V, MF-46V, MU-400V II
(1) (3)
(2) (4)
(5)
OUT IN
(10)
(6) (11)
(9)
(8)
(7)
ME12013R1200800140001
Fig. 6-2
1 Clogging monitor pressure switch 7 Drain outlet

N.C. auto-drain
2 Indicator 8 Drain outlet
N.O. auto-drain
3 Pressure regulator 9 Drain separator
4 Pressure gauge 10 Pressure adjusting knob
5 Air filter 11 Drain outlet
N.O. auto-drain
6 Oil mist filter
6175-E P-219
Adjust the air equipment on the air panel at the back of the machine using the following procedure:
(1) Adjustment of the Regulator Pressure

System pressure 0.5 MPa (72.6 psi)
Table 6-8
= How to adjust pressure =
Lightly pull the pressure adjusting knob downwards.
Next, turn the knob: Clockwise turning → Pressure increases
(2) Draining Oil from the Air Filter

= Air filter =
The air filter removes moisture from the supplied air to prevent corrosion inside the machine.
The air temperature for supply should be within the room temperature + 5 °C (9 °F). Note that
humidity cannot be removed sufficiently if the air temperature is high.
= Draining =
The moisture collected in the air filter bowl is discharged automatically through the drain port by
the auto drain system using a float. Manual draining is possible.
A water sump is to be prepared by the customer.
(3) About the drain separator and oil mist filter
 Highly purified air is needed for spindle bearing lubrication. Inspect and clean as
necessary.
 The drain separator removes moisture from the compressed air.

The oil mist filter removes micro particles of oil and dust from the compressed air.
Both the drain separator and oil mist filter are equipped with auto-drain. Therefore, internal
moisture, etc. is automatically drained.
 The filter element for the oil mist filter has a life of 2 years.
Replace the filter element if the clog monitor pressure switch is triggered (pressure setting:
0.35 MPa (50.79 psi)) or after using the filter for 2 years.
The indicator at the top of the oil mist filter shows the filter element's level of clogging.
When it turns from green to complete red, it is time for replacement.
For details, refer to the [PURCHASED UNIT INSTRUCTION MANUAL].

6175-E P-220
MB-56V, MB-56V-AW
(1)
(2)
OUT IN
(3)
PRESS PRESS
TURN TURN
(4)
(7)
(5)
(6)
ME12013R1200800130001
Fig. 6-3
1 Pressure regulator 5 Pressure adjusting knob

2 Pressure gauge 6 Drain outlet
3 Air intake 7 Air filter
Factory side pressure should be between 0.5 MPa
(72.6 psi) and 1.0 MPa (145.1 psi).
4 Lubricator (optional)
Adjust the air 3-piece set (air filter, regulator, and lubricator) on the air panel at the back of the
machine according to the following procedure:

Table 6-9
= How to adjust pressure =
6175-E P-221
(2) Supplying oil to the lubricator and adjusting its drip-feed rate
= Oil supply =
Remove the oil supply plug and supply oil as needed.
(Oil can be supplied while the oil inside the bowl is pressurized. However, it is necessary to
release the residual pressure inside the bowl by turning the plug a couple of times before
supplying oil.)
= Oil drip-feed adjustment =

The lubricator is provided with a drip-feed adjusting scale. Set the scale to the proper position
according to machine operating conditions.
Reservoir capacity of the lubricator 0.085 L (0.0225 gal) Check the oil volume every day.
Table 6-10
= Oil drip-feed volume =

When the system pressure is set at 0.5 MPa (72.6 psi), one drop of oil should be supplied per 5
to 6 times of tool clamp/unclamp operations (one drop in every 2 seconds with outside fully
opened).
(3) Draining Oil from the Air Filter

= Air filter =
The air filter removes moisture from the supplied air to prevent corrosion inside the machine.
The air temperature for supply should be within the room temperature + 5 °C (9 °F). Note that
humidity cannot be removed sufficiently if the air temperature is high.
= Draining =
The moisture collected in the air filter bowl is discharged automatically through the drain port by
the auto drain system using a float. Manual draining is possible.
A water sump is to be prepared by the customer.
6175-E P-222
Adjusting micro mist separator
(1)
OUT
Φ6
IN (0.24)
(2)
(3)
(5) (4)
ME12013R1200800130002
Fig. 6-4
1 Clogging monitor pressure switch 4 N.O. auto-drain

2 Micro mist separator 5 N.O. auto-drain
3 Drain catch
 A filter set (micromist separator, drain catch, and pressure switch) is mounted in the air panel
located on the right side of the machine.
Since the oil-air lubrication unit for lubricating the spindle bearings requires highly purified air,
inspect and clean the filter whenever necessary.
 The drain catch removes moisture in the compressed air.

The collected water is automatically drained through the auto drain system.
 The micromist separator removes minute oil particle and dust in the compressed air.
The collected oil and dust are automatically drained through the auto drain system. When the
red indicator reaches the top of indication range, replace the filter element.
 The air filter life of each device is two years. Replace the filter elements with new ones if the
clogging monitor pressure switch is triggered (Set pressure: 0.3 MPa (43.5 psi)) or after using
the filters for 2 years.
 For details, refer to the [micromist separator], [drain catch], and [electronic pressure switch]
manuals (from SMC).
6175-E P-223
6-6. Adjusting air equipment for the Abso-Scale system

(optional) (MNTKEY0530)
(1)
OUT
G41D
MAD E JAP AN
IN
IN
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
ME12013R1200800150001
Fig. 6-5
1 Pressure gauge 4 Oil mist filter

2 Pressure regulator 5 Drain outlet
3 Pressure adjusting knob
6175-E P-224
When a machine is equipped with the Abso-Scale system (optional), it is equipped with dedicated
air equipment for eliminating dust and moisture within the scale. Adjust the Abso-Scale air
equipment on the air panel at the back of the machine according to the following procedure:

Table 6-11
= Adjusting pressure =
(2) About the oil mist filter
 The oil mist filter removes micro particles of oil and dust from the compressed air.
The collected oil and dust are automatically drained through the auto drain system.
 The internal filter element has a life of 2 years. The internal filter element should be
changed over 2 years, or every other time the internal element of the micromist separator is
replaced (Refer to [Adjusting micro mist separator]).
Internal filter element model number: Manufacturer CKD, M4000-FL327916

OKUMA part number: H0140-0018-56
6175-E P-225
6-7. Precautions regarding spindle rotation (8,000 min-1/15,000

min-1/20,000 min-1/25,000 min-1/35,000 min-1 (No.40), 6,000
min-1/12,000 min-1 (No.50))
6-7-1. Spindle lubrication (oil-air)

The spindle bearings are lubricated not by grease but by oil-air lubrication system.
The oil-air lubrication system is configured as shown in the diagram below.
Oil-air lubrication unit
Pressure switch
Pressure (Oil-air lubrication unit pres-
gauge sure decrease monitor)
Pressure setting: 0.18 MPa Line filter
(26.12 psi) 30 µm (1,200 µin.) Air bleed valve Pressure switch
(Oil-air lubrication unit pressure increase
Solenoid valve monitor)
Pressure setting: 1 MPa (145 psi)
Float switch Nozzle
(Low oil level monitor)
M Metering piston type
Oil Distributor
Pump Pressure switch Spindle bearing
(Solenoid operation monitor)
Pressure setting: 0.25 MPa (36.28 psi)
Filter kit Orifice
Pressure switch
(Source pressure monitor) Mixing valve
Drain catch (Clogging monitor)
Pressure setting: 0.35 MPa
(50.79 psi)
Air 3-piece set

Micro mist separator Solenoid valve
Air source
Pressure setting: 0.5 MPa (72.6 psi)
ME12013R1200800160001
Fig. 6-6
Oil discharge volume 0.03 mL/stroke x6

Oil discharge volume (20,000 min ) -1 0.03 mL/stroke x5
0.01 mL/stroke x1
Oil discharge volume (25,000 min-1) 0.03 mL/stroke x5
Oil discharge volume (35,000 min-1) 0.03 mL/stroke x10
Table 6-12
6175-E P-226
Principle of operation
 The oil-air lubrication unit (mounted at the rear left of the machine) sends pulse to the metering
piston type distributor (mounted at the right of the spindlehead). On receiving the pulse, the
distributor operates at intervals of 8 minutes only while the spindle is rotating.
 While the spindle is stopped, the distributor is activated once every 60 minutes and oil that is
discharged is then fed to the bearing using compressed air at the reduced flow rate to prevent
machining dust from entering the spindle.
 The discharged oil is carried to the bearings by compressed air. To prevent damage to the
bearings, the following interlock is provided: The NC monitors the oil level of lubricating oil tank,
oil pressure, and air pressure. When a decrease in the oil level, oil pressure, or air pressure is
detected, the NC causes an alarm to stop the spindle.
Application
 A proper amount of oil is fed without fail.
 Temperature rise at the bearings is kept low because the oil is cooled by the air and the
lubrication system does not use much oil.
 The oil mist lubrication requires less oil and therefore causes less contamination of ambient air.
 Unlike the grease lubrication, the oil-air lubrication is highly reliable regardless of the lubricating
oil life.
6-7-2. Lubricating oil and air supply conditions

(1) Use clean and dry air for the compressed.
(2) Keep the air pressure at 0.5 MPa (72.6 psi) and the air flow rate at 500 L/min (132.1 gpm)
(ANR).
(3) Periodically clean the air filer and the micromist separator mounted at the air inlet port, if
necessary. When the red indicator on the micromist separator reaches the top, replace the
internal filter element.
(4) For lubricating oil, use Mobil DTE Oil Light.
(5) Always supply clean and new oil. Never allow mixing of foreign particle into the oil. Failure to
observe this instruction may cause malfunction.
(6) Never disconnect any lubricate piping for between distributors from the piping unit. The
distributors will malfunction if air is entrapped in the piping.
6175-E P-227
6-7-3. Lubrication alarms and reset method
Alarm display Alarm message Cause of alarm

(1) Oil-air pressure rise error The pump discharge pressure does not go up to 1 MPa
(145 psi) (oil pressure switch set value) within 60 seconds
 Oil-air unit pump is faulty.
after pump operation.  Air bleed valve is closed.
 Pressure rise confirmation PS is faulty.
 Line filter is clogged.
 Mixing valve is faulty.
 Air is mixed into the piping.

(2) Oil-air pressure drop error The oil pressure does not drop before the machine comes
to a halt (within 8 minutes).
 Oil-air unit failed to drop its pressure.
 Pressure drop monitoring PS is faulty.

(3) Unit oil level low The tank oil level dropped, which actuated the float switch.  Oil-air unit dropped its oil level.
(4) Air pressure error The air pressure dropped below 0.35 MPa (50.79 psi) (air
pressure switch set value), which opened the pressure
 Air source pressure has dropped.
switch contact.  Micro mist separator clogged.
Table 6-13
[Supplement]
Each of the above errors is indicated as an alarm on the NC screen.

To release the alarm, remove the cause of the alarm then press the RESET button on the OSP
operation panel.
For details, refer to the [Instruction Manual for Centralized Lubrication Unit MR-LUB (issued by
Daido Metal Co., Ltd.)].
6175-E P-228
6-7-4. Spindle bearing life

Spindle bearing life is largely affected by the number of spindle revolution and, therefore, it may be
quite difficult to determine the bearing life under the actual operating conditions.
This machine is equipped with a [SPINDLE BEARING LIFE COUNTER] function which displays on
the NC screen, an indication of the hours of actual operation relative to the life of the spindle
bearing. This information should be useful for periodic maintenance.
For details on the [SPINDLE BEARING LIFE COUNTER] function, refer to [SECTION 6, 6-7-5.
Spindle bearing life counter function].
8,000 min-1/ 15,000 min-1 specification
The spindle bearing life is designed to last for 20,000 hours as a target on condition that the spindle
is rotated continuously at the maximum speed.
Since forced lubrication system is used, there is no limit in lubricating oil life.
When supplying oil, always use new and clean oil.
The spindle bearing life is designed to last for 8,000 hours as a target on condition that the spindle is
rotated continuously at the maximum speed.
35,000 min-1 specification
6175-E P-229
6-7-5. Spindle bearing life counter function

The following [SPINDLE BEARING LIFE COUNTER] screen is added to the [PARAMETER] screen.
On the [PARAMETER] screen, select [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the "DISPLAY CHANGE"
screen, then select "2. SPINDLE BEARING LIFE COUNTER".
The [SPINDLE BEARING LIFE COUNTER] screen is for display of various counter data only. No
data can be set or added on this screen.
ME12013R1200800260001
Fig. 6-7
 "STANDARD SPINDLE BEARING LIFE"

Indicates the standard bearing life when the spindle is rotated at the maximum speed. The NC
calculates the spindle life from the actual number of spindle revolution and the rotating time.
 "SPINDLE BEARING LIFE COUNTER"

Then, it converts the calculated value into the total time estimated on assumption that the
spindle is rotated at the maximum speed. The life time is always calculated even during
machine lock.
 "SPINDLE ACCUMULATION TIME"

Indicates the total time for which the spindle is rotated at 5 min-1 or over.
Also in this case, the machine lock time is not included in the total time.
 "SPINDLE HIGH SPEED TIME"

Indicates the cumulative spindle revolution during which the spindle was operated at 50 % or
faster of its maximum speed.
Also in this case, the machine lock time is not included in the total time.
Note
Each of the above data shows the time in the format of [hours: minutes].
The "SPINDLE BEARING LIFE COUNTER", "SPINDLE ACCUMULATION TIME", and "SPINDLE
HIGH SPEED TIME" are clamped when their counter reaches [99999:59].
6175-E P-230
6-7-6. Replacement of spindle unit

If the spindle generates abnormal heat or vibration, or it does not rotate, the spindle bearings may
be damaged. Immediately contact your OKUMA representative.
Never attempt to disassemble or reassemble the spindle. If the necessity arises, request OKUMA
to do such work.
The spindle units are designed by considering their compatibility.
6-7-7. About tools (25,000 min-1/35,000 min-1 spindle only)

Inadvertently spinning unbalanced tools at a high speed can damage the bearings of the spindle,
and may even result in serious injury or fatal accidents from flying debris should the tool break. Be
sure to use tools that are designed for high speed rotation by consulting with the tool maker.
1) Do not rotate the spindle at speeds exceeding allowable tool rotation speed.
It may result in serious injury or fatal accidents from flying debris should the tool break.
Check allowable tool rotation speed with the tool maker.
2) During high speed machining operation, there is a danger of flying debris such as broken
tools. Always close the full-enclosure shielding during operation.
3) Do not use tools that incorporate cutters that may be discharged by centrifugal force such as
tools with a throw-away tip. They may cause serious injury or fatal accidents.
4) Use dynamic tools and avoid using unbalanced tools. Be especially careful with big-bore tools
and boring bars.
Stop spindle rotation immediately if abnormal vibration occurs during high speed rotation as it
is extremely dangerous. It may result in serious injury or fatal accidents from flying debris
should the tool break.
6-7-8. Other cautions on the spindle (25,000 min-1/35,000 min-1 spindle

only)
(1) Spraying the spindle or its surroundings with air or coolant to clean off any chips or debris can
cause the debris to enter the spindle bearing which may damage the bearing. Use a brush or
rag to brush off the debris when cleaning.
(2) When cleaning the spindle tapered surface, use the supplied cleaning rod and a clean rag.
(3) Do not power off or perform an emergency stop, unless it is an emergency, while there is
machine dust still floating in the machining chamber, as loss of power shuts off air into the
spindle.
Machining dust can enter the spindle, causing damage to the bearing.
6175-E P-231
6-8. Cleaning the air filter of the spindlehead cooling unit

(cooler) (MNTKEY0510)
6-8-1. Spindlehead cooling unit configuration
MB-46V(E)/56V/66V/56V-AW, MF-46V, MU-400V II
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7)
ME12013R1200800300001
Fig. 6-8
1 Exhaust 5 Tank
2 Control panel 6 Coolant level gauge
3 Air filter 7 Drain port
Slightly lift to remove.
4 Oil filler port
6175-E P-232
Clean the air filter for the spindlehead cooling unit at the back of the machine using the following
procedure.
(1) The air filter is located on the right side of the cooling unit when viewed from the back of the
machine.
To remove the air filter, hold the lower end of the filter with both hands and lift it up while arching
it slightly forward.
(2) Clean the filter once every two weeks.
(3) To clean the filter, wash it with water or use compressed air.
1) An uncleaned air filter can significantly reduce cooling efficiency and may cause the protection
mechanism on the compressor to disrupt normal operation.
2) The control temperature setting is set to be synchronized with the machine temperature ±0 °C
(±0 °F).
Do not change the set temperature. (Control panel)
6175-E P-233
6-9. Cleaning the air filter on the thermal deviation

suppression (TAS-C) unit (optional)
6-9-1. Cleaning the air filter on the thermal deviation suppression (TAS-
C) unit (optional) (MNTKEY0840)
MB-46(E)/56V/56V-AW/66V, MU-400V II
A fan motor that feeds external air into the machine is installed on the right side of the machine.
The air filter unit for this fan is located on the front of the fan. Clean the air filter regularly.
(2)
(1)
ME12013R1200800320001
Fig. 6-9
1 Push the filter through the hole. 2 The filter can be removed towards the back of the
machine.
6175-E P-234
MF-46V
(1)
(2)
ME12013R1200800330001
Fig. 6-10
1 The filter can be removed towards the front of the 2 Push the filter through the hole.
machine.
1) Please beware that machine performance and precision may not be maintained if the air filter
is not cleaned regularly.
2) Please beware that extended operation of the machine with the air filter removed will result in
premature deterioration of machine precision.
6175-E P-235
6-10. Replacing and adjusting the APC timing belt (MF-46V

only)
On this machine, a timing belt is used to drive the rotary shaft of the APC fork with the APC drive
motor.
There are several benefits to using a timing belt including its ability to provide smooth rotation by
absorbing motor vibration caused by electrical current fluctuation; its ability to insulate heat from the
motor from reaching the ball screws; and its ability to transmit drive without the backlash that a gear
transmission would have. However, it is necessary to inspect the belt every 6 months. Although the
belt's life is assumed to be comparable to machine life, it can be affected by usage conditions or
wear. If there is significant damage, it must be replaced with a new one.
= 6-month inspection list =
(1) Is the timing belt making a metallic noise during operation?
(2) Is there any wear on the pulley teeth?
(3) Are there any signs of cracks or wear on the timing belt?
(4) Are there any signs of wear on the side of timing belt on one particular side, or any signs the
belt is rolling up on to the pulley?
 If the above (1) or (2) is observed, it is necessary to adjust belt tension to the appropriate
level.
(Refer to [SECTION 6, 6-10-3. Adjusting timing belt tension].)
 If the above (3) is observed, the belt needs to be replaced with a new one.
 If the above (4) is observed, the pulley alignment needs to be adjusted.

(Refer to [SECTION 6, 6-10-4. Precautions when using timing belt].)
The following explains procedures for replacing and adjusting the timing belt.
6-10-1.Precautions when replacing the timing belt
1) Handle the belt with care by following instruction in [SECTION 6, 6-10-4. Precautions when
using timing belt]. Be especially careful not to allow coolant or oil to adhere to the belt or the
pulley.
2) Belt tension greatly affects belt life. Adjust the tension according to the instructions in
[SECTION 6, 6-10-3. Adjusting timing belt tension].
6175-E P-236
6-10-2.Replacing the timing belt for Z-axis drive

The APC drive motor is located below the APC setup station.
Procedure :
1- Remove the skirt cover located below the APC setup station.
2- Loosen the bolts (x4) that secure the motor base.
3- Loosen the belt tension adjusting bolt.
4- Replace the belt with a new one.
5- Tighten the belt tension adjustment belt to adjust the tension.

(Refer to [SECTION 6, 6-10-3. Adjusting timing belt tension] and [SECTION 6, 6-10-4.
Precautions when using timing belt].)
6- Tighten the motor base securing bolts (x4).
7- Attach the skirt cover below the APC setup station.

6175-E P-237
6-10-3.Adjusting timing belt tension (MNTKEY0455)

The belt should have just enough tension to prevent it from slacking. Too much tension will shorten
the life of the belt, or insufficient tension can cause the teeth of the belt to jump out of the grooves of
the pulley. Check belt tension by pushing on the belt midway between the pulleys at force F, as
shown in the figure. If the belt deflects by δ, it has the right amount of tension.
Loosen the 4 bolts that are securing the motor base, adjust belt tension by turning the belt tension
adjusting bolt, re-tighten the motor base securing bolts, then check again if the belt tension is at the
appropriate level.
Set-up station
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
ME12013R1200800380001
Fig. 6-11
1 Belt 5 Skirt cover

2 APC fork 6 Tension meter inlet
3 Belt tension adjusting bolt 7 Motor base securing bolts
4 APC motor 8 Motor base
6175-E P-238
Timing belt model number and tension adjustment table
Push-in force F Belt deflection δ

OKUMA part no. Type
N (lbf) (mm (in.))
Bando
M119-0019-36 35 (7) 7.5 (0.295)
250S8M1280
Table 6-14
6175-E P-239
6-10-4.Precautions when using timing belt
1) When inspecting and servicing the belt, make sure power is shut off and the machine is at a
complete stop.
2) Unless the power is shut off, there is a danger of being caught in the belt if the machine
suddenly starts moving.
(1) Even with the pulley properly aligned, the timing belt tends to move to one side of the pulleys.
Such force to move to one side is very small if the pulleys are properly aligned, but if they are
misaligned, the belt will move to one side at much stronger force. This forces the side of the belt
to rub against the pulley flange at sever force and can lead to wear and severing of the belt. In
addition to excessive wear, such setup will put uneven tension on the belt core, resulting in
abnormally high material fatigue, thereby significantly shortening the life of the belt.
Belt life ratio
ME12013R1200800390001
Relationship between pulley alignment and belt life

Fig. 6-12
For these reasons, proper alignment of the pulleys per the following table is essential.
Belt width (mm (in.)) 25 (0.98)
6
tanθ (Max.)
1,000
Table 6-15
ME12013R1200800390002
Fig. 6-13
6175-E P-240
(2) As its core, the timing belt uses a glass-fiber cord which has very little elasticity.
Therefore, forcing the belt over the flange when installing the belt can be very dangerous. Slide
the motor or loosen the idler when installing the belt.
Never install the belt by force.
ME12013R1200800390003
Fig. 6-14
(3) In operating temperature range of -30 °C (-22 °F) to 90 °C (194 °F), a standard specification
timing belt will perform without any problem.
In high temperature environments (90 °C (194 °F) to 120 °C (248 °F)), please use a heat
resistant timing belt.
120 °C
90 °C
-30 °C
ME12013R1200800390004
Fig. 6-15
6175-E P-241
(4) When the timing belt is contaminated with oil, the belt gets swelled and its life is shortened. Of
the various types of oils, be especially careful with solvents. If there is a risk that the belt may be
contaminated with oil, use an oil-resistant timing belt.
Oil-resistant timing belt
ME12013R1200800390005
Fig. 6-16
(5) Because the glass-fiber cord in its core stretches very little, the belt can be damaged or even be
severed when a foreign object gets entangled during operation. Under such environment,
installation of safety covers are necessary.
ME12013R1200800390006
Fig. 6-17
6175-E P-242
(6) Due to the characteristics of the glass-fiber cord used as its core, the timing belt will be severed
easily if used when it is wet. Therefore, in an environment where the timing belt may be subject
to water splashes, it is necessary to protect the timing belt with a cover. However, humidity is
not an issue unless it results in condensation.
ME12013R1200800390007
Fig. 6-18
(7) Do not bend the timing belt because the core is made of glass-fiber cords that provide very little
stretch.
Do not bend.
ME12013R1200800390008
Fig. 6-19
6175-E P-243
6-10-5.Timing belt and pulley: causes of premature damage and their

countermeasures
Type of damage Cause Countermeasure

1. Severance A. Entangle foreign object A. Install a cover
B. Force install/remove using lever, etc. B. Utilize slider or idler to install/remove
C. Bent at a sharp angle before installation C. Handle with care
2. Wear on edge (rims) A. Misalignment of pulleys A. Adjust per [Pulley alignment]
B. Bent pulley flange B. Correct bend on flange
3. Cracks in rubber cover A. Operating temperature is too high A. Adjust operating environment, or use heat-resistant belt
B. Operating temperature is too low (-30 °C (-22 °F) or B. Adjust operating environment
less)
C. Ozone concentration in environment is too high C. Separate from ozone source
4. Longitudinal split A. Machine was run with the belt sliding off the edge of the A. Adjust pulley position and/or alignment
pulley
B. Belt slipped on to the flange B. Adjust pulley position and/or alignment
5. Swelling of rubber A. Contaminated with a large amount of oil A. Install cover or use oil-resistant belt
6. Generates metallic noise A. Belt tension is too high A. Adjust initial tension
If A does not resolve the problem, use a low-noise belt
7. Wear of teeth on pulley A. Belt tension is too high A. Adjust tension per [SECTION 6, 6-10-3. Adjusting timing
belt tension]
B. Pulley material is inappropriate B. Switch to a harder material or perform surface treatment
Table 6-16
6175-E P-244
6-10-6.Using the Bando tension meter
Parts of the tension meter
Measurement range: Load = 0 kgf (0 lbf) to 12 kgf (26 lbf), Deflection = 0 mm (0 in.) to 62 mm (2.44
in.)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(5)
ME12013R1200800410001
Parts of the Bando tension meter

Fig. 6-20
1 O-ring for load measurement 4 Load scale

2 O-ring for deflection measurement 5 Deflection scale
3 Handle (Sliding part)
6175-E P-245
Preparing for measurement
Procedure :
1- Make sure the sliding part slides smoothly.
2- Position the bottom of the O-ring for deflection measurement to the desired deflection
amount.
3- Slide the O-ring for load measurement to the top of the scale.
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
ME12013R1200800420001
Measurement preparation and deflection measurement position

Fig. 6-21
1 O-ring for load measurement 3 Deflection measurement

2 For deflection measurement 4 Position the bottom of the O-ring to the desired
deflection amount.
4- Locate the center of the span using a tape measure or equivalent.

6175-E P-246
5- When only 1 belt is being used, run a string or a ruler across the 2 pulleys so it can be used
to identify the position of the back side of the belt which is the reference point for deflection
measurement.
(When 2 or more belts are being used, use the back of another belt as the measurement
reference.)
(2) (3)
(1)
ME12013R1200800420002
Tension Measuring Point

Fig. 6-22
1 Reference position for deflection measurement 3 Load measurement point (backside of belt at span
(backside of belt) center)
2 Span Ls
6175-E P-247
Measurement
Procedure :
1- Place the tension meter perpendicularly on the backside of the belt and push straight against
the belt until it reaches the marked deflection amount.
(2)
(1) (3)
ME12013R1200800430001
Tension meter position during measurement

Fig. 6-23
1 Push the tension meter until the bottom of the O-ring 3 Reference position for deflection measurement
is visually in line with the measurement reference.
2 Push perpendicular to the belt up to the measuring
point.
2- After measurement, read the load value at the upper end of the O-ring for load measurement.
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
ME12013R1200800430002
Reading the load after measurement

Fig. 6-24
1 O-ring for load measurement 3 O-ring for load measurement

2 For deflection measurement 4 Upper end of O-ring
6175-E P-248
6-11. Replacing the onboard light
6-11-1.Replacing the fluorescent light (MNTKEY0835)
Configuration of the fluorescent light
MB-46V(E)/56V/66V/56V-AW, MU-400V II
11 10
13 3
9
1
12
14
16 15 2
17 7 5 4
6
8
20
5
18
21
19
ME12013R1200800440001
Fig. 6-25
Procedure :
1- Remove the fluorescent lamp unit by removing the 4 bolts that secure it to the machine.
2- Loosen the 3 bolts (2) on the cable and remove the end-cap (4) from the glass tube.
3- Pull out the bottom plate (15) from the glass tube (19) together with the end-cap (4).
 Pull it out slowly as the cable is still connected.
6175-E P-249
4- Pull out the fluorescent tube (14) plugged into the socket (13) and replace it with a new
fluorescent tube.
 The fluorescent tube is a 4-pin tube, but it has no polarity.
5- Reinstall the bottom plate (15) and end-cap (4) into the glass tube (19).
 The bottom plate and end-cap have mating grooves to prevent it from rotating. Make sure
the grooves are properly positioned.
6- Ensure that the end-cap (4) bracket is positioned correctly, and tighten the 3 bolts (2) evenly.
7- As the bolts (2) are tightened, the O-ring (5) will touch the inside of the glass tube (19).
Check for a snug fit with a 2 mm (0.08 in.) to 3 mm (0.12 in.) seal evenly around the
circumference of the tube to complete the work.
Replacement parts
Fluorescent lamp DULUX-L 36W 4000K or equivalent OSRAM
(OKUMA part number: E3534-905-002)
PL-L36W 4000K or equivalent PHILIPS
60W861 Mitsubishi Electric
 Available at most electric appliance stores.
1) Before replacing the fluorescent lamp, shut off the main power of the machine.
2) The ballast and fluorescent tube are hot immediately after they are switched off. Wait for them
to cool off before performing the work.
6175-E P-250
MF-46V
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(8)
ME12013R1200800450001
Fig. 6-26
1 M6 securing screw [B] 6 [D] socket

2 Retaining screw [A] 7 Aluminum casing
3 Pull out upward 8 [E] Fluorescent lamp metal sheet
4 [F] Fluorescent lamp 9 Glow lamp [G]
5 Ring bracket
Procedure :
1- Remove the fluorescent lamp unit from the machine.

Remove the 4 retaining screws [A].
2- Remove the round mounting base on the cable side.

It can be removed by loosening the M6 securing screw [B] at the top.
3- Remove the six M6 screws [C] from the cable-side end plate.
Be careful not to lose the nuts.
Loosening the ring bracket [D] separates the glass tube from the side bracket.
4- Hold the lamp unit vertically with the cable side down, then pull the glass tube upward.
The tube can be easily removed by lightly pulling on the fluorescent lamp metal sheet [E]
inside the tube.
6175-E P-251
5- Place the fluorescent lamp horizontally and replace the fluorescent lamp [F] and the glow
lamp [G]. When replacing the fluorescent lamp, pull it out from the socket horizontally.
When removing the glow lamp, turn it counterclockwise.
Replacement parts
Fluorescent lamp FPL18EX-N, 18 W, neutral white, a product common to all makers
(OKUMA part number: E3532-820-002)
Glow lamp FP-1P 10-30 W
 The fluorescent lamp and the glow lamp are available in a general electric appliance
shop.
Assemble the fluorescent lamp unit in the reverse order of the above steps 1- to 5-.
Note
When inserting the glass tube, tilt it or make it upright.
The bracket at the end of the glass tube has a groove [H]. Align the metal sheet at the tip of the
lamp unit with this groove and slide it in to complete the insertion.
(1)
(2)
(3)
ME12013R1200800450002
Fig. 6-27
1 Glass tube 3 Metal plate

2 Bracket groove [H]
Before replacing the fluorescent lamp, shut off the main power of the
machine.
Failure to observe this instruction can result in electrocution.
6175-E P-252
6-11-2.Replacing the LED light (MNTKEY0834)
ME12013R1200800540001
Fig. 6-28
The LED light has a life of 50,000 hours (under 25°C environment).
This is the duration from its initial state to 70% dimming.
If its illuminance is not enough, the LED light itself needs to be replaced.
(The internal parts cannot be replaced.)
LED light Model: IDEC LF1D-FH2F-2W-451-01
DC24V 50 Hz/60 Hz 12.5W
Life expectancy: 50,000h (25°C, 70% dimming)
6175-E P-253
6-12. Cleaning the coolant unit (MNTKEY0810)
6-12-1.Cleaning
It is important to maintain the coolant and the coolant tank for continuing safety machining. Supply
the coolant and clean the filter periodically. Also, clean the sludge pan and the inside of the tank as
needed.
(1) Inside the tank, beneath the chip pan, there is a sludge pan.
(2) Remove the cover on the tank and you will see a handle. Lift off the handle.
(3) Remove sludge and chips from the wired pan. Clean the inside of the tank, and check the filter
for clogging and clean it periodically.
MB-46V(E)/56V, MF-46V, MU-400V II
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ME12013R1200800470001
Fig. 6-29
6175-E P-254
1 Sludge pan (with wire netting) 3 Filters (x2)

2 Filters (x2) 4 Cover
MB-66V
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ME12013R1200800480001
Fig. 6-30
1 Sludge pan (x2) (with wire netting) 3 Filters (x2)

2 Filters (x2) 4 Pans (x2)
After cleaning the coolant tank, place the filter correctly at the place
where it was set before starting an operation.
If the tank is not cleaned adequately or if the filter is not set correctly,
chips will be pumped when the machine is started to cause the blocking
of the piping parts, especially the check valves, nozzles, and the pump.
If this occurs, coolant is not delivered to the cutting point appropriately
and serious accidents such as breakage of tools and fire could occur.
6175-E P-255
6-13. Procured parts
On this machine, parts not listed on the spare parts list may be used
from procured parts.
For information on such procured parts, refer to the usage instructions
or technical documents provided by the parts suppliers.
When using procured parts, follow instructions from OKUMA.
6-14. Safety window glass for operation door (MNTKEY0830)
Scattered chips may collide with the window.

To prevent irreversible situations such as life-threatening injuries, serious health hazards, or
considerable property damage, strictly observe instructions when replacing the window.
Old polycarbonate may be penetrated when collided with parts, etc. Operators may be exposed
to the danger.
The safety window glass is made of polycarbonate.

Over time, polycarbonate is affected by the coolants and cleaning agents, and may not be
able to hold up to being hit by scattered chips. The safety window glass is subject to wear
over time.
6-14-1.Replacement interval
Safety window glass performance gradually deteriorates due to coolant corrosion. Accordingly,
scattering chips or a rotating tool may fly out breaking the safety window glass. The safety
window glass must be replaced every two years.
Also, if the safety window glass is broken or cracked, immediately stop using the machine and
replace the safety window glass.
6175-E P-256
6-14-2.Replacement of safety window glass for operation door
How to replace the safety window glass
Procedure :
1- Remove the retainer plate [A] on the inside of the operation door.
2- Replace the polycarbonate window [B] with a new one.
3- Replace the norseal [C] with a new one. (Apply sealing agent on both sides.)
4- Attach the retainer plate [A] on the inside of the operation door.
5- Check for water leakage.
ME12013R1200800510001
Fig. 6-31
6175-E P-257
1 Mounting bolt 3 Polycarbonate window [B]

2 Retainer plate [A] 4 Norseal [C] (Apply sealing agent on both sides.)
Safety window glass performance gradually deteriorates due to cutting fluid corrosion.
Accordingly, scattering chips or a rotating tool may fly out breaking the safety window glass.
The safety window glass must be replaced every two years.
Also, if the safety window glass is broken or cracked, immediately stop using the machine and
replace the safety window glass.
Turn the power off and apply the stopper to prevent the door from
closing when entering the machine.
6175-E P-258
6-15. Inspecting the bellows cover (MNTKEY0831)
(1) (2)
ME12013R1200800550001
Fig. 6-32
1 Bellows cover (left) 2 Bellows cover (right)
 The bellows cover protects the ball screws and guides for X-axis.
 If large amounts of cut chips are adhered to the bellows cover clothes, clean them with a broom,
etc.
 Check if there is any break or deformation on the bellows cover.

If any break or deformation is found, replace the cover. That may cause ablation on ball screws
and guides and result in inaccuracy.
 We selected appropriate material and shape for the bellows cover to maximize its life, but its
expectancy largely varies depending on the machine use frequency, components of the used
coolant and flying chips, etc. When any breakage is found, replace it.
6175-E P-259
6-16. Inspecting the telescopic cover (except MF-46V)

(MNTKEY0832)
(1)
ME12013R1200800560001
Fig. 6-33
1 Telescopic cover
 The telescopic cover protects the ball screws, guides and motors for Y-axis.
 Check if any deformation is found on the telescopic cover and if there is any ablation,
deformation or missing in the telescopic cover wiper. If any defect is found, replace them.
If any deformation is found in the cover, smooth operation may not be expected and breakage
could occur.
If there is any ablation, deformation or missing in the wiper, coolant could enter inside of the
cover and cause inaccuracy due to ablation of the ball screws and guides.
 If any chip is pinched in the telescopic cover wiper, remove it with pliers, etc.
 The telescopic cover is designed to have a life expectancy as follows, but it is largely dependent
on its machine use frequency, chip shape and hardness, and if coolant is used or not. If any
breakage is found, replace it.
Travel life: 4,000 km
6175-E P-260
SECTION 7 ATC
SECTION 7 ATC
7-1. ATC safety precautions
1) To change tools in manual operation, turn the MANUAL INT. switch

on the [MG. MANUAL] panel to ON and firmly insert the tool into the
toolpot to prevent it from falling.
2) When indexing the magazine manually, close the magazine door and
ensure that magazine indexing does not cause problems.
3) Use the tool pull stud with appropriate dimensions. Poor clamping of
the toolpot or the spindle may result in the danger of tools falling out.
4) When a tool is changed, to extract the tool from the tapered bore in
the spindle, the tip of the tool moves 115 mm (4.53 in.) (No.40) or
170 mm (6.69 in.) (No.50) from its state when mounted in the
spindle. The tool changing arm rotates 180° in that position.
Therefore, ensure that the tool does not interfere with the workpiece
before starting the tool change cycle. There is a danger of broken
pieces of the tool being dispersed.
5) Clean the magazine and other units to remove dirt, dust and chips to
avoid an ATC malfunction. Avoid the use of compressed air,
however, because the air could blow chips into the units and could
cause any serious problems. Never clean or perform maintenance
work on the ATC while it is in operation.
6) Some tools in particular become easily entangled with chips.
1) Be careful that the chips do not disrupt ATC magazine operation. Check, before a tool change
is made, that there is no interference between the tool and the workpiece. Do not get close to
or touch any parts during the ATC cycle. Although the tool clamping mechanism in the
magazine and spindle, etc. are all designed to handle the tool without slipping, it is possible
that a sharp tool could drop due to interference with workpieces or other objects.
Do not open the operation door or the magazine door.
2) Pressing the SLIDE HOLD push button switch on the NC operation panel does not stop ATC
operation. If ATC operation must be stopped for any reason, press the EMG. STOP push
button switch.
6175-E P-261
SECTION 7 ATC
7-2. ATC magazine door interlock

 The ATC magazine door incorporates a door lock mechanism and an interlock switch.
 This magazine door is always locked when the MANUAL INT. switch is OFF on the [MG.
MANUAL] panel. The door can be opened by switching MANUAL INT. to ON.
 When the operation door in the front of the machine is open, the magazine door is locked so
that no one can open it. Conversely, the operation door can not be opened when the magazine
door is open. (Except MF-46V)
 Do not slam the door shut such that it bounces back open. Shut it slowly but firmly.
6175-E P-262
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3. ATC tool dimensions
7-3-1. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.40)
MB-46V(E)A/56VA, MF-46VA
(1) Maximum tool dimensions storable with adjacent tool in the magazine
Φ44.45 (1.75)
Φ63 (2.48)
Φ90 (3.54)
32 Φ76 (2.99)
(1.25) 12 (0.47)
300 (11.81)
ME12013R1200900030001
Fig. 7-1
(2) When a boring bar or a similar tool is Φ90 (3.54) or less in outside diameter and the diameters
of the two adjacent tools are both Φ90 (3.54) or less, boring bars with a tool tip diameter up to
Φ125 (4.92) may be placed in the adjacent magazine.
4)
(1)
3.5
Φ44.45
0(
(1.75)
Φ9
Φ104 (4.09)
Φ63 (2.48)
Φ90 (3.54)
Φ76 (2.99)
Φ125 (4.92)
Φ12
5 (4
.92)
12 (0.47)
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
300 (11.81) (2)
ME12013R1200900030002
Fig. 7-2
1 Magazine key position 2 Cutting edge range

6175-E P-263
SECTION 7 ATC
MU-400V II
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ90 (3.54)
(2.99)
(2.48)
Φ76
Φ63
32 (1.25) 12 (0.47)
240 (9.44)
ME12013R1200900040001
Fig. 7-3
(1)
4)
3.5
Φ44.45
0(
(1.75)
Φ9
Φ104 (4.09)
Φ125 (4.92)
Φ90 (3.54)
Φ63 (2.48)
Φ76 (2.99)
Φ12
5 (4
.92)
12 (0.47)
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
240 (9.44)
(2)
ME12013R1200900040002
Fig. 7-4

6175-E P-264
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-56VA-AW
(1) Maximum tool space available in magazine
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ80 (3.15)
Φ56 (2.2)
(2.48)
Φ63
32
(1.25)
336 (13.22) 95 (3.74)
19 (0.74)
450 (17.71)
ME12013R1200900050001
Fig. 7-5
 On MB-56V-AW, maximum tool size is the same regardless of whether an adjacent tool is present
or not.
6175-E P-265
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66VA
42 50 (1)
308 (12.12) (1.65) (1.96)
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ90 (3.54)
(2.48)
(2.99)
Φ40 (1.57)
Φ63
Φ76
32 (1.25) 12 (0.47)
400 (15.74)
ME12013R1200900060001
Fig. 7-6
1 Magazine key position
However, available space can be limited depending on the orientation in which the tool is stored
in the magazine.
50
280 (11.02) 70 (2.75) (1.96)
2)
Φ44.45
(1)
(4.9
(1.75)
25
Φ1
Φ104 (4.09)
Φ125 (4.92)
Φ90 (3.54)
Φ76 (2.99)
(2.48)
Φ40 (1.57)
Φ63
Φ90
(3.5
4)
12 (0.47)
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
400 (15.74) (2)
ME12013R1200900060002
Fig. 7-7

6175-E P-266
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3-2. Maximum tool size with no adjacent tools (No.40)
MB-46V(E)A/56VA, MF-46VA
(1) Maximum tool dimensions that can be stored in the magazine with adjacent tool pots empty
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ125 (4.92)
Φ63 (2.48)
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
300 (11.81)
ME12013R1200900070001
Fig. 7-8
(2) If outer diameter of the bar is Φ125 (4.92) or less, tools such as boring bars with a tool tip
diameter up to Φ190 (7.48) may be used by setting them in an orientation that does not
interfere with other tools.
0.75)]
[R273 (1
(1)
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ125 (4.92)
[110 (4.33)]
[101 (3.98)]
Φ190 (7.48)
Φ125
(4.92
Φ63 (2.48)
)
. 48)
0 (7
Φ1 9
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
10.75)]
300 (11.81)
[R273 (
(2)
ME12013R1200900070002
Fig. 7-9

6175-E P-267
SECTION 7 ATC
MU-400V II
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ125 (4.92)
Φ63 (2.48)
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
240 (9.44)
ME12013R1200900080001
Fig. 7-10
diameter up to Φ190 (7.48) may be used by setting them in an orientation that does not
0.75)]
[R273 (1
(1)
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ125 (4.92)
Φ125
[110 (4.33)]
[101 (3.98)]
(4.92
Φ63 (2.48)
Φ190 (7.48)
)
.48)
0 (7
Φ19
32 (1.25)
10.75)]
30 (1.18)
[R273 (
240 (9.44)
(2)
ME12013R1200900080002
Fig. 7-11

6175-E P-268
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66VA
(1)
280 (11.02) 70 (2.75) 50 (1.96)
Φ44.45
(1.75)
Φ125 (4.92)
Φ63 (2.48)
Φ40 (1.57)
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
400 (15.74)
85 (3.34)
60 (2.36)
0.75)]
)] 0.75
]
0.14)
(2) (3)
[R273 (1
[R273 (1
300 (11.81) 50 (1.96) 50 (1.96)
7.5 (1
20 (0.78)
Φ44.45
[R25
(1.75)
Φ125 (4.92)
[31 (1.22)]
[101 (3.98)]
[101 (3.98)]
Φ63 (2.48)
Φ94 (3.7)
Φ40 (1.57)
[31 (1.22)]
.48)
32 (1.25) 30 (1.18)
2)
0 (7
Φ125 (4.9
400 (15.74)
Φ19
ME12013R1200900090001
Fig. 7-12
1 Magazine key position 3 Magazine key position

2 Cutting edge range
6175-E P-269
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3-3. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.50)
MB-46V(E)B/56VB, MF-46VB
Φ69.85
(2.75)
Φ100 (3.94)
46
(1.81)
300 (11.81)
ME12013R1200900100001
Fig. 7-13
(2) With a boring bar or a similar tool, if the outer diameter of the bar is Φ100 (3.94) or less, and the
diameters of the two adjacent tools are both Φ100 (3.94) or less, boring bars with tool tip
diameter up to Φ152 (5.98) may be placed in the adjacent tool pots.
Φ1
Φ69.85
52
(2.75)
(5. (1)
98)
.94)
0 (3
Φ100 (3.94)
Φ152 (5.98)
Φ1 0
46 40
(1.81) (1.57)
300 (11.81)
(2)
ME12013R1200900100002
Fig. 7-14

6175-E P-270
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-56VB-AW
(1) Maximum tool space available in magazine
Φ69.85 (2.75)
Φ80 (3.15)
Φ56 (2.2)
38 (1.49)
336 (13.22) 45 (1.77)
19
(0.74)
400 (15.74)
ME12013R1200900110001
Fig. 7-15
 On MB-56V-AW, maximum tool size is the same regardless of whether an adjacent tool is present
or not.
6175-E P-271
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66VB
(1)
Φ69.85
346 (13.62) 54 (2.12)

(2.75)
Φ100 (3.94)
Φ40 (1.57)
46
(1.81)
400 (15.74)
ME12013R1200900120001
Fig. 7-16

6175-E P-272
SECTION 7 ATC
(2) With a boring bar or a similar tool, if the outer diameter of the bar is Φ100 (3.94) or less, and the
diameters of the two adjacent tools are both Φ100 (3.94) or less, boring bars with tool tip
diameter up to Φ152 (5.98) may be placed in the adjacent tool pots.
in the magazine.
Φ69.85
(2.75)
300 (11.81) 100 (3.93) (1)

Φ69.85
(2.75)
.94)
0 (3
Φ10
Φ100 (3.94)
Φ152 (5.98)
Φ40 (1.57)
Φ15
2 (5.9
8)
46 40
(1.81) (1.57)
400 (15.74)
(2)
ME12013R1200900120002
Fig. 7-17

6175-E P-273
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3-4. Maximum tool size with no adjacent tools (No.50)
MB-46V(E)B/56VB, MF-46VB
Φ69.85
(2.75)
Φ152 (5.98)
Φ100 (3.94)
46 40
(1.81) (1.57)
300 (11.81)
ME12013R1200900130001
Fig. 7-18
diameter of up to Φ250 (9.84) may be used by setting them in an orientation that does not
4)]
0 (9.8
(1)
[R25
Φ69.85
(2.75)
84)
0 (9.
Φ152 (5.98)
Φ100 (3.94)
[95 (3.74)]
Φ25
Φ15
2 (5
.98
Φ250 (9.84)
46 40
) ]
(9.84
(1.81) (1.57)
[R250
300 (11.81)
(2)
ME12013R1200900130002
Fig. 7-19

6175-E P-274
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66VB
300 (11.81) 100 (3.93)

Φ69.85
(1)
(2.75)
Φ152 (5.98)
Φ100 (3.94)
Φ40 (1.57)
46 40
(1.81) (1.57)
400 (15.74)
ME12013R1200900140001
Fig. 7-20

6175-E P-275
SECTION 7 ATC
diameter of up to Φ250 (9.84) may be used by setting them in an orientation that does not
in the magazine.
(9.84)]
(1)
[R250
.98)
300 (11.81) 100 (3.93) (2)
Φ69.85
2 (5
(2.75)
Φ15
Φ152 (5.98)
Φ100 (3.94)
[95 (3.74)]
[95 (3.74)]
84)]
Φ40 (1.57)
0 (9.
[R25
84)
46
(9.
40
(1.81) (1.57) 314 (12.36)
50
Φ2
400 (15.74)
ME12013R1200900140002
Fig. 7-21

6175-E P-276
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3-5. Maximum tool mass moment
MB-46V(E)A/56VA/66VA, MF-46VA, MB-56VA-AW, MU-400V II
(1)
Φ44.45 (1.75)
100 (3.93)
ME12013R1200900150001
Fig. 7-22
1 78.4 N (17.6 lbf) (Mass 8 kg (18 lb))
The allowable maximum tool weight, including the tool shank, is 8 kg (18 lb) and the center of gravity
must be within 100 mm (3.94 in.) from the datum diameter (Φ44.45 (1.75)) position.
6175-E P-277
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-46V(E)B/56VB/66VB, MF-46VB, MB-56VB-AW
(1)
Φ69.85 (2.75)
130 (5.11)
ME12013R1200900160001
Fig. 7-23
1 117.6 N (26.5 lbf) (Mass 12 kg (26 lb)) [147 N (33 lbf) (Mass 15 kg (33 lb))]
The maximum tool mass, including the tool shank, shall be 12 kg (26 lb) (15 kg (33 lb)) and the
center of gravity shall be 130 mm (5.12 in.) from the datum diameter (Φ69.85 (2.75)) position.
 The 15 kg (33 lb) tool is optional.

6175-E P-278
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3-6. ATC workpiece interference diagram (No.40)
MB-46VA/46VAE
210 (8.26) 560 (22.05) [762 (30)] X travel
280 (11.02) 280 (11.02)

[381 (15)] [381 (15)]

Center of tool change arm

125
(4.
92)
Ma
x. t
ool
dia
me
ter
ol
3) To tat-
. 5 ro
(16 g arm eter
230 (9.05)

42 ngin iam
460 (18.11) Y travel
d
cha ing
230 (9.05)

[1,000 (39.34)]
Center of table
L
610 (24.02) (Tool change position)
(4.52)
115
610-(115+L)
(Workpiece)
Max. workpiece load
500 kg (1,100 lb)
[700 kg (1,540 lb)]
[ ]46VAE
ME12013R1200900170001
Fig. 7-24
 By setting the boring bit so that its cutter faces the same way as the tool pot key, the cutter will
come to this position when the tool is inserted in the spindle.
6175-E P-279
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-56VA
210 (8.26) 1,050 (41.34) X travel

525 (20.66) 525 (20.66)

125
(4.
92)
Ma
x. t
ool 
dia
me
ter
ool
54 ) T rotat-
.
(16 arm ter
280 (11.02)
420 nging iame

d
cha ing
560 (22.05) Y travel
280 (11.02)
Center of table
(4.52)
115
(Workpiece) Max. work-

610-(115+L)
piece load
900 kg (1,980 lb)
ME12013R1200900180001
Fig. 7-25
6175-E P-280
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66VA
210 (8.26) 1,500 (59.06) X travel
Center of tool change arm 750 (29.52) 750 (29.52)

(No.40 ATC)
125
(4.9
2) M
ax.
tool
diam
eter
l
oo t-
)4 T rota
330 (12.99)
.5 m r

(16 g ar mete
660 (25.98) Y travel
0
42 ngin dia
a g
ch in
330 (12.99)
Center of table
610 (24.02) (Tool change position) 200 (7.87)

piece load
660 (25.98) Z travel
1,500 kg (3,300 lb)

810 (31.88)
(4.52)
115
610-(115+L)
(5.91)
150
ME12013R1200900190001
Fig. 7-26
6175-E P-281
SECTION 7 ATC
MF-46VA
591 (23.26)
1 (0.04) 1 (0.04)
460 (18.11)
762 (30) (X-axis st.)
560 (22.04)
(Y-axis st.)
210
(8.26) 381 (15.00) 381 (15.00)
(4.92)
Φ125 tool di-
) (Max. r)
.54 amete
(3.93)
(16
100
20
Φ4
(3.14)
80
230 (9.05)
150 (5.91) 460 (18.11) 150 (5.91)
460 (18.11)
380 (14.96)
8)
230 (9.05)
.1
51
0 0(
1,3
150 (5.91)
760 (29.92)
APC center of rotation

460 (18.11)
(4.52)
115

piece load
400 kg (880 lb)
[610-(115+L)]
640-(115+L)
[150 (5.91)]
180 (7.09)
ME12013R1200900200001
Fig. 7-27

6175-E P-282
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-56VA-AW
210 (8.26) 1,050 (41.34) X travel

525 (20.66) 525 (20.66)
80
(3.
15
)M
ax.
too
l di
am
ete
r
ol
To t-
. 54) rota
(16 arm ter
280 (11.02)
420 nging iame

d
cha ing
560 (22.05) Y travel
280 (11.02)
Center of table
1,010 (39.76) (Tool change position)
(4.52)
115
1,010-(115+L)
ME12013R1200900210001
Fig. 7-28
6175-E P-283
SECTION 7 ATC
MU-400V II
210 (8.26) 762 (30) X travel
381 (15.00) 381 (15.00)
1
125
(49
.2)
Ma
x. t
ool
dia
me
ter
ol
) To tat-
4
.5 ro
(16 g arm eter
230 (9.05)
0
42 ngin iam
460 (18.11) Y travel
d
cha ing )
.74
(15
400
70 (2.75)
230 (9.05)
2
Center of table when A is at 0°.
134.8 205.4 Center of table when A is at

(5.307) (8.086) 90°.
240 (9.44)
490 (19.29)
105 (4.13)
355 (13.97)
(4.52)
115
180 (7.08)
130 (5.11)
370 (14.56) 420 (16.53)

70 (2.75)
ME12013R1200900220001
Fig. 7-29
1 By setting the boring bit so that its cutter faces the same way as the tool pot key, the cutter
will come to this position when the tool is inserted in the spindle.
2 Tool change is possible for tool size up to 240 mm (9.45 in.).
6175-E P-284
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3-7. ATC workpiece interference diagram (No.50)
MB-46VB
[762 (30)]
220 (8.66) 560 (22.05) X travel
280 (11.02) 280 (11.02)
[381 (15)] [381 (15)]
Center of tool change arm 

125
(4.
92)
Ma
x. t
ool
dia
me
ter
ol
To t-
. 32) rota
230 (9.05)
(17 arm ter

440 nging iame
460 (11.81) Y travel
d
cha ing
230 (9.05)

[1,000 (39.94)]
Center of table
L
170 (6.69)
610-(170+L)

piece load
500 kg (1,100 lb)
[700 kg (1,540 lb)]
[ ]46VBE
ME12013R1200900240001
Fig. 7-30
6175-E P-285
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-56VB
220 (8.66) 1,050 (41.34) X travel

525 (20.66) 525 (20.66)

15
2(
5. 9
8)
Ma
x. t
o
am ol di-
ete
r
ool
) T rotat-
280 (11.02) 280 (11.02)
. 32

(17 arm ter
560 (22.05) Y travel
440 nging iame

d
cha ing
Center of table
610-(170+L) (6.69)
170
(Workpiece) Max. workpiece load

900 kg (1,980 lb)
ME12013R1200900250001
Fig. 7-31
6175-E P-286
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66VB
220 (8.66) 1,500 (59.06) X travel
Center of tool change arm 750 (29.52) 750 (29.52)

(No.50 ATC)
152
(5.9
8) M
ax.
too
l di
am
ete
r
330 (12.99)
l
oo g

)2 T otatin
660 (25.98) Y travel
.3 r
0 (17 arm ter
44 nging iame
a d
ch
330 (12.99)
Center of table
200 (7.87)
(Workpiece) Max. workpiece load

660 (25.98) Z travel
1,500 kg (3,300 lb)

810 (31.88)
(6.69)
170
(5.91)
150
610-(170+L)
ME12013R1200900260001
Fig. 7-32
6175-E P-287
SECTION 7 ATC
MF-46VB
220 (8.66) 762 (30) X travel

1 (0.04) 1 (0.04)
560 (22.05) (Y-axis st.)

380 (14.96) 380 (14.96)
460 (18.11)
ool
ax. t
(M
.8)
2 (59 er)
15 met
dia
25 (0.98)
)
.32
(17
(3.93)
100
440
g
gin g
(3.14)
han tatin er
80
l c o t (3.54)
230 (9.05)
o
To arm r iame
90

d 105 45
(14.96)
380
(4.13) (1.77)
150 (5.91) 460 (18.11) 150 (5.91)
230 (9.05)
8)
(5 1.1
00
1,3
150 (5.91)
APC center of rotation

640 (25.20) [610 (24.02)] (Tool change position)
L
460 (18.11)

170 (6.69)
piece load
400 kg (880 lb)
[610-(170+L)]
640+(170+L)
[150 (5.91)]
180 (7.08)
ME12013R1200900270001
Fig. 7-33

6175-E P-288
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-56VB-AW
220 (8.66) 1,050 (41.34) X travel

525 (20.66) 525 (20.66)

80
(3.
15)
(M
ax.
too
l di
am
ete
r)
ol
To at-
32) m rot
280 (11.02) 280 (11.02)

7.
(1 ar ter
560 (22.05) Y travel
440 nging iame

a d
ch ing
Center of table
1,010 (39.76) (Tool change position)
L
1,010-(170+L) (6.69)
170
ME12013R1200900280001
Fig. 7-34
6175-E P-289
SECTION 7 ATC
7-3-8. ATC magazine interference diagram
Limit for magazine tools (No.40)
(1)
(7.48)
R2
Φ190
73
(10
.75
)
(5)
Φ125 (4.9
2)
(6)
(2)
4.92)
Φ125 (
(3)
101.6 P (4.000)
Φ9
0 (3
.54
)
Φ125
(4.92) Φ9
0 (3
.54
)
Φ9
0(
3.5
4)
(7)
(4)
Machine front (Diagram of magazine when viewed from the above.)
ME12013R1200900290001
Fig. 7-35
6175-E P-290
SECTION 7 ATC
1 When both adjacent pots are vacant, boring bars with 5 Holder for attachment (optional)
tool tip diameter up to Φ190 (7.48) can be used in this Set in the orientation as shown in this figure.
area as long as the outer diameter of the bar is Φ125 Both adjacent tool pots must be vacant and big-bore
(4.92) or less. (For multiple use, leave 2 or more pots tool designation is necessary.
vacant in between.)
2 Max. face milling diameter Φ125 (4.92) 6 Tool pot key position
3 When using a tool exceeding Φ90 (3.54), both 7 If tool diameter is Φ90 (3.54) or less, it will not
adjacent tool pots must be vacant. (Big-bore tool interfere with other tools.
designation is necessary.)
4 When a boring bar is Φ90 (3.54) or less in outside
diameter and the diameters of the two adjacent tools
are both Φ90 (3.54) or less, tools with tool tip diameter
up to Φ125 (4.92) may be placed in the adjacent
magazine.
6175-E P-291
SECTION 7 ATC
Limit for magazine tools (No.50)
(4)
)
R25
84
(9.
0 (9
50
.84
Φ2
)
(5)
Φ152 (5.9
8)
(1)
(6)
.98)
Φ152 (5
(2)
127 P
5.98)
Φ152 ( 100
(3.9
Φ100 4)
(3.94)
100
(3.9
4)
(3)
(7)
Machine front (Diagram of magazine when viewed from the above.)
ME12013R1200900300001
Fig. 7-36
6175-E P-292
SECTION 7 ATC
1 Max. face milling diameter Φ125 (4.92) (Outer 5 Position of tool pot key
diameter Φ152 (5.98))
2 When using a tool exceeding Φ100 (3.94), both 6 Set the attachment holder (optional) in the orientation
adjacent tool pots must be vacant. (Big-bore tool shown in this figure.
designation is necessary.) Both adjacent tool pots must be vacant and big-bore
tool designation is necessary.
3 When a boring bar is Φ100 (3.94) or less in outside 7 If tool diameter is Φ100 (3.94) or less, it will not
diameter and the diameters of the two adjacent tools interfere with other tools.
are both Φ100 (3.94) or less, tools with tool tip
diameter up to Φ152 (5.98) may be placed in the
adjacent magazine.
4 When both adjacent pots are vacant, boring bars with
tool tip diameter up to Φ250 (9.84) can be used in this
area as long as the outer diameter of the bar is Φ152
(5.98) or less. (For multiple use, leave 2 or more pots
vacant in between.)
6175-E P-293
SECTION 7 ATC
7-4. Preparing the ATC
7-4-1. Preparing ATC tools
No.40 tool
(1) [Tool shank] NT No.40 taper for milling machines.
(2) [Tool grip] Comply with MAS (403-1982) BT40. In particular, be sure to keep 16.6 mm (0.654
in.) ± 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) distance between the ladder-like grooves and the datum diameter
(Φ44.45 (1.75)) of the shank taper.
(Refer to the [Separate volume technical sheet].)
(3) [Pull stud] Use MAS (407-1982) type 2. With the pull stud firmly screwed into the tool, make
sure the distance between the Φ15 (0.59) point on the pull stud to the datum diameter (Φ44.45
(1.75)) of the shank taper is 93.4 mm (3.677 in.) -0.3 mm (-0.012 in.) + 0.2 mm (0.008 in.).
(4) [Maximum tool length] 300 mm (11.81 in.) (240 mm (9.45 in.) for MU-400V II), (400 mm (15.75
in.) for MB-66VA), (450 mm (17.72 in.) for MB-56VA-AW) from the taper datum diameter
(Φ44.45 (1.75)) to the tip of the tool.
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3. ATC tool dimensions].)
(5) [Maximum tool diameter with adjacent tool] Maximum diameter of a tool that can be used in
adjacent magazine tool pots is Φ90 (3.54) (Φ80 (3.15) for MB-56VA-AW).
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-1. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.40)].)
(6) [Maximum tool diameter with no adjacent tool] Maximum diameter of tools that can be used
when both adjacent magazine tool pots are vacant is Φ125 (4.92). When these tools are used,
they are assigned as big-bore tools (L).
The specification of the code of a big-bore tool automatically sets dummy grippers on both
sides, which prevents entry of tool number data for these grippers. An attempt to enter a tool
number for them results in an alarm.
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-2. Maximum tool size with no adjacent tools (No.40)] and [SECTION
7, 7-3-8. ATC magazine interference diagram].)
 Except MB-56VA-AW.
(7) [Maximum tool mass] The maximum mass of a cutting tool, including its shank, is 8 kg (18 lb).
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-5. Maximum tool mass moment].)
(8) [Maximum tool mass moment] While maximum tool mass is 8 kg (18 lb), a tool's center of
gravity also must be 100 mm (3.94 in.) or less from the datum diameter (Φ44.45 (1.75)). That is,
the allowable maximum moment is
TM < 78.4 N (17.6 lbf) (8 kg (18 lb)) x 100 mm (3.94 in.) = 7.8 N-m (5.8 lbf-ft) (7,840 kg-mm)
Therefore, for a 4 kg (9 lb) tool,
Thus, the center of gravity must be within 200 mm (7.87 in.) of the datum diameter.
(9) [Face milling (full back)] Cutters up to 5R can be attached. Even with smaller milling cutters, be
aware that the cutter body can sometimes be larger than Φ125 (4.92). When using a cutter that
exceeds Φ125 (4.92), it must be manually installed onto or removing from the spindle.
6175-E P-294
SECTION 7 ATC
(10) [Boring bar] When using boring bars, always be careful with the orientation of the cutting tip.
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-1. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.40)] and [SECTION 7,
7-3-8. ATC magazine interference diagram].)
If the outer diameter of the bar is Φ90 (3.54) or less, and the adjacent tool is up to Φ90 (3.54),
boring bars with a tool tip diameter between Φ90 (3.54) and Φ125 (4.92) can be used
adjacently.
(11) [Maximum boring bar diameter] With no adjacent tool on either side, and with the tool set in the
same orientation as the key, a boring bar with a tool tip diameter of up to Φ190 (7.48) can be
used.
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-2. Maximum tool size with no adjacent tools (No.40)].)
If you selected optional tools other than MAS BT40, refer to the standards for those tools and pull
stud.
No.50 tool
(1) [Tool shank] NT No.50 taper for milling machines.
(2) [Tool grip] Comply with MAS (403-1982) BT50. In particular, be sure to keep 23.2 mm (0.913
in.) ± 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) distance between the ladder-like grooves and the datum diameter
(Φ69.85 (2.75)) of the shank taper.
(3) [Pull stud] Use MAS (407-1982) type 2. With the pull stud firmly screwed into the tool, make
sure the distance between the Φ23 (0.91) point on the pull stud to the datum diameter (Φ69.85
(2.75)) of the shank taper is 136.8 mm (5.386 in.) -0.3 mm (-0.012 in.) + 0.2 mm (0.008 in.).
(4) [Maximum tool length] 300 mm (11.81 in.) (400 mm (15.75 in.) for MB-56VB-AW/66VB) from the
taper datum diameter (Φ69.85 (2.75)) to the tip of the tool.
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3. ATC tool dimensions].)
adjacent magazine tool pots is Φ100 (3.94) (Φ80 (3.15) for MB-56VB-AW).
 Except MB-56VB-AW.
(7) [Maximum tool mass] The maximum mass of a cutting tool, including its shank, is 117.6 N (26.5
lbf) (12 kg (26 lb)).
6175-E P-295
SECTION 7 ATC
(8) [Maximum tool mass moment] While maximum tool mass is 117.6 N (26.5 lbf) (12 kg (26 lb)), a
tool's center of gravity also must be 130 mm (5.12 in.) or less from the datum diameter (Φ69.85
(2.75)). That is, the allowable maximum moment is
TM < 117.6 N (26.5 lbf) (12 kg (26 lb)) x 130 mm (5.12 in.) = 15.3 N-m (11.3 lbf-ft) (1,560 kg-
mm)
Therefore, for a 10 kg (22 lb) tool,
15.3 N-m (11.3 lbf-ft) (1,560 kg-mm) / 98 N-m (72 lbf-ft) (10 kg (22 lb)) = 157 mm (6.18 in.)
exceeds Φ152 (5.98), it must be manually installed onto or removed from the spindle must be
performed manually.
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-7. ATC workpiece interference diagram (No.50)], [SECTION 7, 7-3-
3. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.50)], [SECTION 7, 7-3-8. ATC magazine
interference diagram].) Also, if the outer diameter of the bar is Φ100 (3.94) or less, and the
adjacent tool is up to Φ100 (3.94), boring bars with a tool tip diameter between Φ100 (3.94) and
Φ152 (5.98) can be used adjacently.
used.
If you selected optional tools that are not MAS. BT.50, refer to the standards for those tools and pull
studs.
6175-E P-296
SECTION 7 ATC
HSK-A63 tool
(1)
ME12013R1200900330001
Fig. 7-37
1 Spindle end face contact surface
(1) [Tool shank] is HSK-A63.
(2) Shank and grip shall conform to DIN69893-1. However, certain dimensions of turning tools are
specially controlled to ensure high precision mounting. When using tools other than OKUMA
standard tools, please consult your OKUMA representative.
(3) [Maximum tool length] 400 mm (15.75 in.) from the surface that comes in contact with the
spindle end face to the tip of the tool.
adjacent magazine tool pots is Φ90 (3.54)
(6) [Maximum tool mass] The maximum mass of a cutting tool, including its shank, is 117.6 N (26.5
lbf) (12 kg (26 lb)).
(7) [Maximum tool mass moment] While maximum tool mass is 78.4 N (17.6 lbf) (8 kg (18 lb)), a
tool's center of gravity also must be 100 mm (3.94 in.) or less from the datum diameter (Φ44.45
(1.75)). That is, the allowable maximum moment is
TM < 78.4 N (17.6 lbf) (8 kg (18 lb)) x 100 mm (3.94 in.) = 7.8 N-m (5.8 lbf-ft) (800 kg-mm)
Therefore, for a 49 N (11 lbf) (5 kg (11 lb)) tool,
7.8 N-m (5.8 lbf-ft) (800 kg-mm) / 49 N-m (36 lbf-ft) (5 kg (11 lb)) = 160 mm (6.3 in.)
exceeds Φ125 (4.92), it must be manually installed onto or removing from the spindle.
6175-E P-297
SECTION 7 ATC
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-1. Maximum tool size with adjacent tool (No.40)] and [SECTION 7,
7-3-8. ATC magazine interference diagram], [SECTION 7, 7-3-6. ATC workpiece interference
diagram (No.40)].)
Also, if the outer diameter of the bar is Φ100 (3.94) or less, and the adjacent tool is up to Φ100
(3.94), boring bars with a tool tip diameter between Φ100 (3.94) and Φ152 (5.98) can be used
adjacently.
used.
7-4-2. Setting tools into the ATC magazine

(1) The ATC can store up to 20 (32, 48) (optional) tools. Each tool pot is marked with numbers from
1 to 20 (32, 48), while tools in the pots are managed by the memory-random system.
(2) For efficient setup, preset the tool point using a tool presetting device.
(3) When placing tools in the ATC magazine, make sure they do not interfere with adjacent tools.
(Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-3-8. ATC magazine interference diagram].) With a random memory
operation, the correspondence between the tool number and the pot number changes with the
progress of machine operation. (Except MB-56V-AW)
(4) Before loading tools, thoroughly clean the tapered shank of the tools and tool pots.
Foreign particles on the tapered shank arbor can lead to poor machining accuracy.
(5) Load the tools specified on the program process sheet into the corresponding tool pots. Make a
memo of the correspondence between the tool number and the pot number.
By pushing the tool into the tool pot strongly, the tool is held by spring action.
The tool will be held in the tool pot by spring action.
(6) When setting tools having a retaining pin such as those described below, ensure that the pin
comes to the allowable range shown in the tool interference diagram in order for the tool to be
mounted in the spindle correctly: Through-the-tool coolant adaptors, high speed spindles,
angular attachments, multi-spindle tools, reversible tappers, etc. (Except MB-56V-AW)
(7) Never tighten a tool, for example by tightening the milling chuck, while it is set in a tool pot.
Otherwise, the tool pot could be damaged.
(8) Before starting ATC automated operation, enter ATC tool numbers. (Refer to [SECTION 7, 7-5.
Manual ATC operation].)
(9) When placing tools in the magazines, distribute the tools evenly throughout the magazines. An
unbalanced magazine can lead to indexing problems or may even affect machining precision,
so be careful.
To solve this problem, insert unused tools into empty pots for balancing. When using a heavy
tool with a big-bore, determine the other tool positions taking care to distribute the weight of the
heavy tool all over the magazine.
(10) To remove the tool from the toolpot, insert the provided tool release lever in the gap between
the pot face and the tool. Holding the tool with one hand, push the lever and the tool can be
easily pulled out.
6175-E P-298
SECTION 7 ATC
7-4-3. Manual magazine indexing operation

Magazine indexing can be performed using AUTO or MDI, as well as the [MG. MANUAL] panel on
the left of the ATC door.
The magazine door is closed.

ATC is not in operation.
MG.MANUAL
MANUAL INT.
O I
INDEX START
CW CCW
DOOR INTERLOCK
RESTART
EMG.STOP
ME12013R1200900360001
Fig. 7-38
6175-E P-299
SECTION 7 ATC
Operating method
(1) Set MODE SELECT on the NC operation panel to MANUAL.
(2) On the [MG. MANUAL] panel, perform the following procedures.
For indexing the magazine to the next pot:
Procedure :
1- Turn the MANUAL INT. ON/OFF switch ON. Then, turn the CONSTANT INDEX ON/OFF
switch OFF.
2- Turn the outer ring of the INDEX START switch to CW or CCW, then press its inner push
button switch. The magazine is unclamped and the next pot is indexed.
For indexing the magazine continuously:
Procedure :
1- Turn the MANUAL INT. ON/OFF switch ON.
2- Turn the outer ring of the INDEX START switch to CW or CCW, then press its inner push
button switch.
3- When the rotation comes one tool before the tool to be indexed, release the selector push
button switch. The magazine stops at the next pot and then be clamped.
To perform magazine indexing during AUTO, turning ON the MANUAL INT. ON/OFF switch will
make it possible to perform the above indexing procedure. After indexing the magazine manually, be
sure to turn this switch off.
[Supplement]
If the magazine is rotated during finish cutting, vibration generated during magazine rotation
could leave cutter marks on the surface of workpiece being machined. To avoid such defects, do
not index the magazine during finish cutting by changing the program. During finish cutting,
manual magazine index must also be avoided.
6175-E P-300
SECTION 7 ATC
7-5. Manual ATC operation

In addition to ATC continuous operation using AUTO or MDI, operation is possible using manual
from the NC operation panel.
7-5-1. One step advance and one step return

In the "1 STEP ADVANCE" and "1 STEP RETURN" operation, the ATC cycle advances or returns
according to its operation sequence. This type of operation is not carried out during normal machine
operation.
This mode of operation is not used in normal operation, but is necessary when checking ATC
operation, or after the EMG. STOP button is pressed during ATC operation, and it becomes
necessary to return to ATC initial conditions before resuming operation.
When operating the ATC manually, make sure to close the front door.
The tool change arm and tools swing around at very high speeds,
posing extreme danger of pinching your hand or being caught in such
moving parts.
Procedure :
1- Set MODE SELECT on the NC operation panel to MANUAL.
2- Press MACHINE OPERATION flat key.
ME12013R1200900390001
Fig. 7-39
6175-E P-301
SECTION 7 ATC
3- Press ATC button.

[ATC OPERATION] is displayed.
ME12013R1200900390002
Fig. 7-40
4- By using a functional key, "1 STEP ADVANCE" or "1 STEP RETURN" operation can be
done.
6175-E P-302
SECTION 7 ATC
7-5-2. One cycle start and return cycle start

(1) "1 CYCLE START" initiates a tool change cycle in which the tool picked up from the magazine
is mounted on the spindle and the tool currently mounted on the spindle is returned to the
magazine.
Operation is possible when the operation screen is in the "START OK" state.
(2) "RETURN CYCLE" starts the return cycle which returns the tool to the magazine, and is used
when the ATC cycle is interrupted, for example.
ME12013R1200900400001
Fig. 7-41
7-5-3. Precautions for manual ATC operation

(1) When "CYCLE RUN" is displayed on the operation screen, the "1 STEP ADVANCE", "1 CYCLE
START", and "RETURN CYCLE" keys are inoperable. Press the RESET push button switch to
cancel "CYCLE RUN".
(2) If the EMG. STOP button is pressed while the tool change arm is in operation, the ZHP (Z-axis
tool change position) and SHP (spindle indexing completion) signals may be lost and may
consequently make the "1 STEP ADVANCE" and "RETURN CYCLE" keys inoperable. In this
case, check the next operation, check for safety, then, while pressing and holding the
INTERLOCK RELEASE key, press the "1 STEP ADVANCE" key. The interlock is disregarded,
and the one stop advance operation is performed.
(3) When the ATC cycle is interrupted by an emergency stop during operation steps [7], [8], or [9],
the machine stops in the "SPINDLE TOOL CLAMP" state, making "1 STEP ADVANCE" or
"RETURN CYCLE" inoperable. When this occurs, to return the spindle to the [tool unclamp]
state, go to manual tool change on the right side of the spindlehead and press the TOOL
UNCLAMP push button switch.
(4) ATC Pot No./Tool No. Table (Setting Tools)

With a vertical machining center that has a relatively small number of tools in the tool magazine,
memory-random method is generally adopted for the ATC operation. For machining centers
equipped with a large-capacity tool magazine, fixed address method is adopted.
This machine adopts memory-random ATC.
6175-E P-303
SECTION 7 ATC
7-5-4. Memory-random ATC specification

In the memory-random ATC system, the relationship between the tool number and the pot number
constantly changes. This is because the "ACT TOOL" removed from the spindle is returned to the
pot from which the "NXT TOOL", to be mounted on the spindle next, was taken. As such, before
using the ATC, it is necessary to place the tools in the pots and set the initial relationship between
the tool numbers and the pot numbers.
In addition, since the use of a big-bore tool may cause interference with adjacent tools, the control
must be capable of recognizing a big-bore tool so that the tool pot which accommodates one is
placed between the pots having dummy tools or no tool. That is, the big-bore tool must be returned
to the tool pot originally stored.
A big-bore tool is distinguished from other conventional tools based on tool diameter as shown in
the table below.
No.40 tool No.50 tool

Small-diameter tool Φ90 (3.54) or less Φ100 (3.94) or less
Big-bore tool Φ90 (3.54) or over Φ100 (3.94) or over
Table 7-1
Also, on MB-66VB (No.50) 15 kg (33 lb) tool specification, tool change arm speed must be set as
follows in order to prevent damage to the ATC mechanism and to ensure safe operation.
 For small mass (12 kg (26 lb) or less) tools: High speed operation
 For large mass (15 kg (33 lb) or less) tools: Low speed operation
Tool change shall be performed at the above 2 operation speeds.

For large mass tools, set as heavy tool from the setup screen.
MB-66VA MB-66VB
Small mass tool - 12 kg (26 lb) or less
Large mass tool - 15 kg (33 lb) or less
Table 7-2
Always operate at slow speed for big-bore and large mass tools.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in damage to the machine or the tool falling.
Tool numbers and pot numbers can be set using the following 2 methods.
 Create a table listing the initial relationship between tool numbers and pot numbers. Enter this
relationship information from the operation screen, and then set the tools in the "RET POT" in
the magazine.
 Mount each tool on the spindle, then, using the manual tool change cycle, place each tool in a
"RET POT" or an automatically selected vacant pot.
6175-E P-304
SECTION 7 ATC
Setting from an initial relationship table
ME12013R1200900430001
Fig. 7-42
Procedure :
1- Under MANUAL mode, press TOOL DATA key.
2- Press [F8] (CHANGE DISPLAY) to display [TOOL DATA] screen and select [MAGAZINE
INFO.] sheet.
3- On the pot tool correspondence table (left of the screen), set the cursor on any pot number.
4- When [F1] (INSERT TOOL) is pressed, [SELECT TOOL] screen is displayed and an
available tool data list is displayed. Tool data you want to specify needs to be registered
beforehand. For how to register tool data, see the separate volume of [OSP-P300S/P300M
OPERATION MANUAL].
ME12013R1200900430003
Fig. 7-43
6175-E P-305
SECTION 7 ATC
5- Set the cursor on the tool you want to specify, press [F7] (OK).
Now you can specify a pot number and a tool number.
[Supplement]
 The pot number in yellow indicates that the pot is in the ATC change position.
 Pot numbers can be set from 1 to the total number of magazine pots in the specification, which
is 20 tools for standard specification. Tool number is from 1 to 99999999, or 999 sets.
 A big-bore tool can be set to a pot only if both adjacent "TOOL NO." are either "NONE" or set
to Dummy (D). If either of the adjacent pots has a "TOOL NO." assigned, an alarm is triggered.
The setting of a big-bore tool in a tool pots automatically sets dummy tool code, "D", at two
adjacent tool pots.
 An error occurs if any of two tool numbers share the same pot number.
6175-E P-306
SECTION 7 ATC
Setting method by the manual operation
Procedure :
1- Set to MANUAL mode.
2- Press MACHINE OPERATION key on the operation panel.
ME12013R1200900440001
3- On the right of the screen being displayed, select ATC button to display [ATC OPERATION]
screen.
ME12013R1200900440002
Fig. 7-44 [ATC OPERATION] screen
4- Set the data for "RET POT", "ACT TOOL" and "NXT TOOL".
The data to be set for these items are described below.
6175-E P-307
SECTION 7 ATC
"RET POT"
Specify the pot number when returning the "ACT TOOL" to the magazine pot.
To set a pot number, select [F1] (SET) in the function menu and input the desired pot number.
[Supplement]
1) The allowable maximum number is the maximum number of pots.

2) If the specified "POT NO." already has a "TOOL NO." assigned, an error occurs.
3) If the "ACT TOOL" already is specified as a big-bore tool, an error will result unless both
adjacent pots of the "RET POT" are either designated as Dummy or No Tool.
"ACT TOOL"
Specify the pot number to return the current tool to the magazine pot.
Move the cursor to the input area of "ACT TOOL" and select [F1] (SET) in the function menu. This
displays the [SET] pop-up window.
Enter any number into "TOOL NO.".
ME12013R1200900460001
Fig. 7-45 [SET] pop-up window
[Supplement]
1) The allowable maximum number is 99999999.

2) If the selected tool number is already assigned to another pot number, an error occurs.
3) If the "RET POT" already is an assigned pot, and is subsequently designated as a big-bore
tool, unless both adjacent pots of the "RET POT" are either Dummy or No Tool, an alarm will
result.
4) If the "RET POT" is not an assigned pot and, if the "ACT TOOL" is designated as a big-bore
tool, an error will result if there are no vacant pots with adjacent pots that are both either
Dummy or No Tool.
6175-E P-308
SECTION 7 ATC
"NXT TOOL"
This is the "TOOL NO." of the tool that will be mounted on the spindle next.
When setting tools to the pots for the first time, this box should be left blank.
Information for the "NXT TOOL" is set in the same manner as for the "ACT TOOL" by using the
[SET] pop-up window.
[Supplement]
1) Maximum value is the same as that of the "ACT TOOL".

2) An error occurs if the specified tool number is not assigned to a pot number.
3) Designation of a big-bore tool (L) and a dummy tool (D) is not allowed.
4) If the "RET POT" already has received a pot assignment, it will result in an error.
Storing tools in magazine pots
There are two methods of storing a tool in a magazine pot: specifying a pot, and auto-searching
empty pots.
The procedure for storing tools to magazine pots is explained below for each of these approaches.
For instructions on how to manually set a tool on the spindle, refer to [SECTION 5, 5-3-5. Clamping
and unclamping the tool in spindle].
Storing a tool by specifying a pot
Procedure :
1- Move the cursor to "RET POT" using the cursor keys.
2- Enter the pot number and press the WRITE key.
3- Set a tool in the spindle.
4- Move the cursor to "ACT TOOL" using the cursor keys.
5- Select [F1] (SET) from the function menu, enter the "ACT TOOL" and press the WRITE key.
At this time, "NXT TOOL" must be set to "NONE". If "NXT TOOL" already has a "NXT TOOL"
number in it, "NXT TOOL" must be cleared. To clear "NXT TOOL", place the cursor on the
"NXT TOOL", select [F1] (SET) from the function menu. Then, press [F5] (TOOL NO.
CLEAR) to delete the set number.
6- Press "1 CYCLE START".

The tool set in the spindle is returned to the specified pot and, at the same time, the
correspondence between the tool number and the pot number is established. If a tool is
already assigned to the "RET POT" it gives an error and aborts the tool store process.
6175-E P-309
SECTION 7 ATC
Storing a tool by auto-searching empty pots
Procedure :
1- Clear the "RET POT" command by entering an "".
2- Set a tool in the spindle.
3- Enter the "ACT TOOL" number for the "ACT TOOL".

At this time, "NXT TOOL" must be set to "NONE".
4- Press "1 CYCLE START".

An empty pot closest to the presently indexed pot is automatically selected and the tool is
returned to this pot.
[Supplement]
1) When 1 cycle start is performed, it is the same as for a normal tool change operation if a tool
number is set for "NXT TOOL".
2) "RET POT" command is automatically cleared after 1 cycle start is performed.
3) "RET POT" commands are for tool storage. Therefore, an error will occur if 1 cycle start is
performed when both "NXT TOOL" and "RET POT" commands have been issued.
4) For automatic empty pot selection, choose an empty pot closest to the pot being indexed in a
clockwise direction. If there is no empty pot, an alarm occurs and the spindle tool is not
returned to a pot.
6175-E P-310
SECTION 7 ATC
7-6. ATC continuous operation
7-6-1. Initial conditions for continuous ATC operation

When performing ATC tool change using AUTO or MDI, either of the following may be used:
 Tool Number Command: 8-digit T code
 Tool Change Command: M06 (M19 Spindle position stopping included)
However, before pressing the CYCLE START push button switch, it is necessary to confirm that the
following initial conditions are met.
(1) "ATC SEQ. NO." is set to [1].

[1] is the sequence reached when the tool change has completed.
If the sequence number is not [1], set it to [1] per ATC manual operation. (Refer to [SECTION 7,
7-5. Manual ATC operation].)
(2) Both the "ACT TOOL NO." and "NXT TOOL NO." should be "NONE".
If not "NONE", select [F1] (SET) and then press [F5] (TOOL NO. CLEAR) to set the "ACT
TOOL" and "NXT TOOL" numbers to "NONE".
(1)
(3)
(2)
ME12013R1200900510001
Fig. 7-46
1 (1) To be set to [1]. 3 (3)To be set to "NONE".

2 (2)To be set to "NONE".
(3) The MODE SELECT on the NC operation panel should be set to AUTO or MDI.
In addition to the conditions indicated above, other preparatory steps indicated below necessary for
starting the AUTO must be performed in advance.
 Mounting the workpiece
 Adjusting zero point offset
 Tool length offset
 Reading NC program
6175-E P-311
SECTION 7 ATC
7-6-2. ATC operation sequence
MB-46V(E)/56V, MF-46V, MB-56V-AW, MU-400V II
By specifying the tool number of Txx (xx is the tool data set number; 01 through 40 is standard)
which has already been written in memory, the T command is displayed as the tool number in the
next stage and the magazine is to be indexed.
With the M06 command programmed next, the spindlehead is located at the tool changing position
and the spindle stops at a fixed position at the same time. The magazine pot will be in a position
facing down. The tool changing arm changes the spindle tool and returns the tool removed from the
spindle to the magazine. After the tool has been returned to the magazine, the tool number used as
the next tool number is shifted to the current tool number and waits for the next T command.
In the final machining process, the M63 command is executed if there are no tools in the next
process. ATC cycle finishes only after returning the current tool without a new tool being loaded by
the magazine.
These series of operations are as shown in the diagram in [SECTION 7, 7-6-3. ATC operation
sequence diagram]. The operation sequence number is displayed on the [ATC STATUS
INDICATING] panel on the operation screen.
The tool change cycle is described below.
[ATC operation according to sequence number]
No. Operation
1 Write "NXT TOOL"
2 CONTINUE (No movement)
3 Magazine indexing
5 Waiting for completion of machine cycle (Pot rotates 30°)
6 Tool changing position (HP1) Z-, X-, Y-axes, ATC shutter open
7 Spindle orientation
9
11 Rotate tool changing arm 90° (Tool grasp position)
12 Spindle tool cylinder unclamp
14 Tool changing arm at tool removal position ("ACT TOOL" removal):
Lowering position
16 Rotate tool changing arm 180°
17 CONTINUE (No movement)
18 Magazine pot in vertical state
20 Current (removed) tool magazine indexing
22 Magazine pot hold
23 Spindle tool cylinder unclamp
25 Tool changing arm at tool insert position ("NXT TOOL" attachment): Rising
position
6175-E P-312
SECTION 7 ATC
No. Operation
26 Spindle tool cylinder clamp
28 Rotate tool changing arm 90° to stand-by position
29 Magazine pot in vertical state
Table 7-3
Note
 Operations 17 to 24 are for handling a big-bore tool.
[Supplement]
When next process tool preparatory operation is attempted during end face finish cutting, there
might be cases in which the finished surface is affected. In this case, any measures such as
incorporating the dwell is necessary.
Operation
The machine / NC unit No. ATC
group
Cycle start
Instruct initial process tool number → Preparing the initial tool (T01)
(Eg. T01) ↓ [1] Write next process tool number 01
↓ ↓
Stop spindle rotation ↓ [3] Index magazine (T01)
X, Y, Z positioning ↓
↓ ←←←←←← ← ↓ [5] Waiting for completion of machine cycle (Pot rotates 30°)
↓ ↓
Instruct tool change (M06) → Mounting the initial tool on the spindle (T01)
↓ ↓ [6] to [28] ATC shutter open
↓ ↓ [6] and [7] simultaneous operation
↓ ↓ [6] Tool changing position
↓ ↓ (ATC home position: HP1)
↓ ↓ Z, X, Y-axes movement -> Complete
↓ ↓ [7] Spindle orientation start -> Complete
↓ ↓ [11] Rotate tool changing arm 90° (Tool grasp position)
↓ ↓ [12] Spindle tool cylinder unclamp
↓ ↓ [14] Tool changing arm lowers ("ACT TOOL" removal)
↓ ↓ [16] Rotate tool changing arm 180°
↓ ↓ [25] Tool changing arm rises ("NXT TOOL" attachment)
↓ ↓ [26] Spindle tool cylinder clamp
X, Y, Z positioning ↓ [28] Rotate tool changing arm 90° and retract
(Begin cutting) ← ↓ [29] Magazine pot vertical position
↓ (M06 answer at horizontal position)
Instruct next process tool number → Preparing the "NXT TOOL" (T02)
↓ ↓ [3] Index magazine (T02)
(Begin cutting) ←←←←←← ← ↓ [5] Waiting for completion of machine cycle (Pot rotates 30°)
↓ ↓
(Cutting complete) → Exchanging "NXT TOOL" and "ACT TOOL" (T02) ←→ (T01)
Instruct tool change (M06) [Exchange between two small-diameter tools]
6175-E P-313
SECTION 7 ATC
Operation
group
↓ ↓ [16] Tool changing arm rotates 180°
X, Y, Z positioning ↓ [28] Rotate tool changing arm 90° and hold
Instruct next process tool number → "NXT TOOL" (T04)
(e.g. T04) ↓ [1] Write next process tool number 04
(Begin cutting) ←←←←←← ← ↓ [5] Waiting for completion of machine cycle (Pot rotates 30°)
↓ ↓
Instruct tool change (M06) [Exchange of small- and big-bore tools]
↓ ↓ [6] and [7], [16] to [18] simultaneous operation
↓ ↓ [18] Magazine pot vertical position
↓ ↓ [20] Current (removed) tool magazine indexing
↓ ↓ [22] Magazine pot hold position
↓ ↓ [28] Rotate tool changing arm 90° and hold
X, Y, Z positioning ← ↓ [29] Magazine pot vertical position
(Begin cutting) (M06 answer at vertical position)
Table 7-4
6175-E P-314
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66V
By specifying the tool number of Txx (xx is the tool data set number; 01 through 40 is standard)
which has already been written in memory, the T command is displayed as the tool number in the
next stage and the magazine is to be indexed.
With the M06 command programmed next, the spindlehead is located at the tool changing position
and the spindle stops at a fixed position at the same time. The magazine pot will be in a position on
the spindle side. The tool changing arm changes the spindle tool and returns the tool removed from
the spindle to the magazine. After the tool has been returned to the magazine, the tool number used
as the next tool number is shifted to the current tool number and waits for the next T command.
In the final machining process, the M63 command is executed if there are no tools in the next
process. ATC cycle finishes only after returning the current tool without a new tool being loaded by
the magazine.
These series of operations are as shown in the diagram in [SECTION 7, 7-6-3. ATC operation
sequence diagram]. The operation sequence number is displayed on the [ATC STATUS
INDICATING] panel on the operation screen.
The tool change cycle is described below.
[ATC operation according to sequence number]
No. Operation
1 Write "NXT TOOL"
3 Magazine indexing
5 Waiting for completion of machine cycle (Pot rotates 30°)
31 Manual tool changing position (HP2) Z-, X-axes
32 Tool changing position (HP1) Z-, X-, Y-axes, ATC shutter open
7 Spindle orientation
9
11 Rotate tool changing arm 90° (MB-66V) (Tool grasp position)
12 Spindle tool cylinder unclamp
14 Tool changing arm at tool removal position ("ACT TOOL" removal):
Lowering position
16 Rotate tool changing arm 180°
18 Magazine pot in vertical state
20 Current (removed) tool magazine indexing
22 Magazine pot hold
23 Spindle tool cylinder unclamp
25 Tool changing arm at tool insert position ("NXT TOOL" attachment): Rising
position
26 Spindle tool cylinder clamp
6175-E P-315
SECTION 7 ATC
No. Operation
28 Rotate tool changing arm 90° (MB-66V) to stand-by position
29 Magazine pot in vertical state
Table 7-5
Note
 Operations 17 to 24 are for handling a big-bore tool.
[Supplement]
When next process tool preparatory operation is attempted during end face finish cutting, there
might be cases in which the finished surface is affected. In this case, any measures such as
incorporating the dwell is necessary.
Operation
group
Cycle start
Instruct initial process tool number → Preparing the initial tool (T01)
↓ ↓
Stop spindle rotation ↓ [3] Index magazine (T01)
X, Y, Z positioning ↓
↓ ↓
↓ ↓ [31] Manual tool change position
↓ ↓ Move Z-, X-axes
Instruct tool change (M06) → Mounting the initial tool on the spindle (T01)
↓ ↓ [32] to [28] ATC shutter open
↓ ↓ [14] to [25] slow movement for heavy tool
↓ ↓ [11] Rotate tool changing arm 90° (MB-66V)
↓ ↓ (Tool grasp position)
↓ ↓ [16] Rotate tool changing arm 180°
X, Y, Z positioning ↓ [28] Rotate tool changing arm 90° (MB-66V) and retract
Instruct next process tool number → Preparing the "NXT TOOL" (T02)
(Begin cutting) ↓ [31] Manual tool change position
6175-E P-316
SECTION 7 ATC
Operation
group
Instruct tool change (M06) [Exchange between two small-diameter tools]
↓ ↓ [14] to [25] slow movement for heavy tool
X, Y, Z positioning ↓ [28] Rotate tool changing arm 90° (MB-66V) and hold
Instruct next process tool number → "NXT TOOL" (T04)
(e.g. T04) ↓ [1] Write next process tool number 04
(Begin cutting) ↓ [31] Tool changing position
Instruct tool change (M06) [Exchange of small- and big-bore tools]
↓ ↓ [31] and [32], [16] to [18] simultaneous operation
↓ ↓ [18] Magazine pot vertical position
↓ ↓ [20] Current (removed) tool magazine indexing
↓ ↓ [22] Magazine pot hold position
↓ ↓ [28] Rotate tool changing arm 90° (MB-66V) and hold
X, Y, Z positioning ← ↓ [29] Magazine pot vertical position
(Begin cutting) (M06 answer at vertical position)
Table 7-6
6175-E P-317
SECTION 7 ATC
7-6-3. ATC operation sequence diagram
MB-46V(E)/56V/56V-AW, MF-46V, MU-400V II
Spindlehead
[1] Next tool writing
[18] [3]
[22] [29]
[6]
[6]
[7]
5 [11] [6]
[28] [25']
4
3 Pot
2 1 [11'] [28]
[26]
[25]
[12][23]
[16'] [14]
Forward
[14']
Tool changing arm
[16]
ME12013R1200900540001
Fig. 7-47
 [1] through [29] indicate ATC operation sequence number.
 When "ACT TOOL" and "NXT TOOL" are both small-diameter tools, sequence numbers [1]
through [16] and [25] through [29] are performed. ([17] through [24] are skipped.)
 When "ACT TOOL" and "NXT TOOL" are different type tools such as a big-bore and a small-
diameter tool, sequence numbers [1] through [29] are repeated.
6175-E P-318
SECTION 7 ATC
MB-66V
Spindlehead
[1] Next tool writing
[18] [3]
[22] [29]
[32]
[32]
[7]
5 [11] [32]
[28] [25']
4
3 Pot
2 1 [28']
[26]
[14] [12][23]
Forward [16']
[14']
Tool changing arm
[16]
ME12013R1200900550001
Fig. 7-48
 [1] through [32] indicate ATC operation sequence number.
 When "ACT TOOL" and "NXT TOOL" are both small-diameter tools, sequence numbers [1]
through [16] (with [31] [32] inserted) and [25] through [29] are performed. ([17] through [24] are
skipped.)
 When "ACT TOOL" and "NXT TOOL" are different type tools such as a big-bore and a small-
diameter tool, sequence numbers [1] through [29] (with [31] [32] inserted) are repeated.
 For heavy tools, sequences [14], [16], and [25] are performed at slow speed.
6175-E P-319
SECTION 7 ATC
7-7. Adjusting ATC

(1) Adjusting Accuracy of ATC
Misalignment or defective adjustment of ATC components will result in malfunction of ATC or
drop of a tool.
Movements of ATC tool change arm and indexing of the magazine are controlled by OSP. The
arm unit and the magazine unit can be adjusted with the adjust bolts provided for each unit.
However, these adjustments require special skills. Please consult with OKUMA service
personnel to make these adjustments.
(2) ATC LIMIT Switches and air pressure solenoid valves

Solenoid valves and proximity switches are located as shown in [ATC Switch Arrangement] in
the [Separate volume technical sheet].
These switch statuses can be checked with the check data display on OSP screen.
For details, refer to the [OSP-P300S/P300M MAINTENANCE MANUAL].
6175-E P-320
SECTION 8 APC
SECTION 8 APC
8-1. Overview of the two-pallet rotary-shuttle APC (MF-46V

standard specification)
8-1-1. Construction
This APC exchanges the two pallets installed on the machine table and the setup station by holding
and rotating them with the servo motor drive fork of the APC main unit. The machine table
incorporates a pallet clamper. The splash guard functions in synchronization with the pallet change
cycle and separates the processing unit from the setup station after the change.
The machine uses four tapered cone-pins to position the pallet with high accuracy. When rotating
the pallet, the machine blows compressed air on the cone-pine to remove dust and chips. In
addition, the machine checks the pallet seated condition. If chips or dust is found between the cone-
pin and the pallet, the machine issued an alarm.
For pallet dimensions, refer to separately attached sheet.
Pallet with tapped holes Pallet with T-slots

Pallet dimensions 460 mm x 760 mm 460 mm x 760 mm
(18.11 in. x 29.92 in.) (18.11 in. x 29.92 in.)
Maximum load 400 kg (880 lb) 345 kg (759 lb)
Table 8-1
6175-E P-321
SECTION 8 APC
8-1-3. Limitation on workpiece center of gravity

When using APC, avoid mounting a workpiece with unbalanced load so that the workpiece does not
fall on the pallet.
The following drawing shows the center of gravity range of the workpiece with the maximum load.
: Allowable center of gravity position
380 (14.96)
 
760 (29.92)
(1) (2)
380 (14.96)
30 (1.18)
142.5 (5.61) 142.5 (5.61) 145 (5.7)
460 (18.11)
ME12013R1201000030001
Fig. 8-1
1 APC side 2 Crossrail

390 (15.35)
50 (1.96)
)
.96
0 (14
30
(1.1 38
8)
14
(5.6 2.5
)
1) 14 .96
(5.6 2.5 0 (14
1)
14 38
(5.7 5
)
ME12013R1201000030002
Fig. 8-2
The part marked with  indicates the direction relative to the attitude in the machining room.
6175-E P-322
SECTION 8 APC
8-2. Operating the two-pallet rotary APC
8-2-1. Safety precautions for APC operation
Never activate the automatic pallet changing function when a person is inside the
machine.
Failure to observe these instructions will pose immediate danger that, unless rectified, may lead
to death or serious injury.
(1) Confirm that the W. LOAD FINISHED lamp is OFF before loading or unloading workpieces on
the APC. When the W. LOAD FINISHED lamp is ON, an M60 command will initiate operation.
(2) During the automatic pallet change operation, operations of the APC fork and pallet must be
carefully attended to. Do not try to touch the APC.
(3) If there are any chips on the machine table, make sure they are promptly washed off by the
coolant unit before APC operation, as it will interfere with pallet clamping operation.
(4) Spraying the spindle and its surroundings with air or coolant to clean off any chips or debris can
cause the debris to enter the drive system and may cause malfunction. When cleaning the
pallet or workpiece, either brush it off with a brush or a rag, or wash it off with the washing gun.
8-2-2. Conditions for automatic pallet changing operation

a. The magazine door and the APC setup station door are securely closed.
b. A pallet is set on the machine.
c. Another pallet is set on the APC. Note that pallet changing operation always requires two
pallets.
d. The pallet on the APC is correctly positioned by the location pin.
e. The SETUP COMPLETION push button switch should be pressed. The work setup completion
state can be cancelled by placing the APC MANUAL INT. switch in the ON position.
f. The MODE SELECT on the NC operation panel should be set to AUTO or MDI.
6175-E P-323
SECTION 8 APC

The pallet changing cycle called out by the M60 command is carried out in the following sequence.
a. APC is at ready position. Check whether the SETUP COMPLETION button is pressed on the
NC side.
b. The Y-axis moves to the APC position (pallet A position).
c. Pallet unclamped
d. APC fork rises.
e. APC fork rotates 180° (to pallet B position).
f. APC fork lowers.
g. Pallet clamped
The cycle above is for changing the pallet on the machine with the pallet at APC ready position.
6175-E P-324
SECTION 8 APC
8-3. Two-pallet rotary APC operation sequence
8-3-1. Pallet changing operation sequence

(1) Operating Conditions
a. Magazine door and APC setup station door are securely closed.
c. Another pallet is set on the APC. (Note that pallet changing operation always requires two
pallets.)
d. The pallet on the APC is positioned at the correct position (in-position) by means of the
location pin.
e. The W. LOAD FINISHED push button switch should be pressed. (To reset setup
completion, turn the MANUAL INT. switch on the APC operation panel to the ON position.)
(2) NC command
M60 Pallet exchange command
Table 8-2
(3) Operation Sequence

(1) APC is at ready position
Check setup completion
(2) To Y-axis APC position (pallet A position)
Machine table is indexed to 0° position
(3) Pallet unclamped
(4) APC fork rises
(5) APC fork rotates 180° (to pallet B position)
(6) APC fork lowers
(7) Pallet clamped
Table 8-3
The cycle above is for changing the pallet on the machine with the pallet at APC ready position.
6175-E P-325
SECTION 8 APC
8-3-2. APC operation sequence diagram

(1) APC preparation
(2) To Y-axis APC position (pallet A position)
(3) Pallet unclamped
A
3
ME12013R1201000080001
Fig. 8-3
(4) APC fork rises
B
4
ME12013R1201000080002
Fig. 8-4
(5) APC fork rotates 180° (to pallet B position)
5 B
ME12013R1201000080003
Fig. 8-5
6175-E P-326
SECTION 8 APC
(6) APC fork lowers
6
A
ME12013R1201000080004
Fig. 8-6
(7) Pallet clamped
ME12013R1201000080005
Fig. 8-7
6175-E P-327
SECTION 8 APC
8-4. Continuous operation of the two-pallet rotary APC
8-4-1. Initial conditions for continuous APC operation

(1) Ensure that the front of the machine's full-enclosure shielding and the 2 doors on the APC main
unit are firmly closed.
When these doors are open, the interlock will prevent APC operation.
(2) A pallet is set on the machine.
(3) Another pallet is set at the APC ready position.

Two pallets must always be used. Therefore, even when machining of only one workpiece is
required, it is necessary to use two pallets.
(4) The pallet on the APC is positioned at the correct position (in-position) by means of the location
pin.
(5) The W. LOAD FINISHED push button switch should be pressed.

By pressing the W. LOAD FINISHED button after attaching the new workpiece to a pallet, the
lamp on the switch is lit, and the next APC replacement command is enabled. This button is
provided to ensure operator safety by preventing pallet change cycle start while work setting up
is being carried out.
MANUAL INT. W.LOAD FINISHED
MANUAL INT. W.LOAD FINISHED

O I
RESTART SPLASH GUN

O I
EMERGENCY STOP
ME12013R1201000090001
Fig. 8-8
To reset setup completion, turn the MANUAL INT. switch on the APC operation panel to the ON
position.
6175-E P-328
SECTION 8 APC
ME12013R1201000090002
Fig. 8-9
After the above, pressing the CYCLE START button will cause the M60 command to start a
change sequence as described in [SECTION 8, 8-3. Two-pallet rotary APC operation
sequence]. The CYCLE START button also is available on the APC operation panel.
1) If, due to interference or other reasons, it is necessary to stop APC operation during an APC
sequence, use the EMG. STOP button.
2) Note that the SLIDE HOLD push button switch works for axis feed only, thus it cannot be used
to stop APC or ATC operation.
6175-E P-329
SECTION 8 APC
8-5. Manually operating the two-pallet rotary type APC

In addition to continuous APC operation using AUTO or MDI, manual operation is possible using
[ATC OPERATION] on the NC operation panel.
8-5-1. Safety precautions for manual APC operation

(1) While the CYCLE RUN lamp is lit, the following manual control buttons are disabled: "1 STEP
ADVANCE", "1 STEP RETURN", "1 CYCLE START" and "RETURN CYCLE". In this case,
press the RESET push button switch to turn off the In-Cycle lamp.
(2) Under certain conditions, such as when the EMG. STOP button is pressed while the APC fork is
rotating, the shifter retraction position signal may turn off, and the "1 STEP ADVANCE", "1
STEP RETURN" and "RETURN CYCLE" keys may be disabled. In this case, press the "1 STEP
ADVANCE" key while pressing the INTERLOCK RELEASE push button switch. The APC
carries out one step operation by ignoring the interlock.
If power is shut off during clamping operation, the operation may be

resumed when power is reinstated. This can lead to danger of being
caught in the clamp.
6175-E P-330
SECTION 8 APC

In "1 STEP ADVANCE" and "1 STEP RETURN" operation, operation takes place one step at a time
in the same order as the APC sequence.
This mode of operation is not used in normal operation, but is necessary when checking APC
operation, or after the EMG. STOP button is pressed during APC operation, and it becomes
necessary to return to APC initial conditions before resuming operation.
Procedure :
2- Press MACHINE OPERATION flat key on the operation panel.
ME12013R1201000120001
Fig. 8-10
3- On the right of the screen being displayed, select APC button to display [APC OPERATION]
screen.
ME12013R1201000120002
Fig. 8-11
4- The "1 STEP ADVANCE" and "1 STEP RETURN" operation is enable with the corresponding
function keys.
6175-E P-331
SECTION 8 APC

(1) The "1 CYCLE START" key executes a sequence of pallet change operations that unloads the
pallet on the machine to the APC, then loads the pallet on the APC to the machine.
The operation is possible when "START OK" is displayed on screen.
(2) "RETURN CYCLE" starts the return cycle which returns the pallet to the machine, and is used
when the APC cycle is interrupted, for example.
ME12013R1201000130001
Fig. 8-12
6175-E P-332
SECTION 8 APC
8-6. Overview of the two-pallet parallel APC (For MB-46V(E)/

56V/66V (optional))
8-6-1. Construction
This APC is installed on the right side of the machine. It is equipped with an APC main unit on which
a pallet may be loaded, a pallet clamp system on the machine table side, and a drive system to load
and unload the pallet. To make pallet B setup operation easier at the APC unit, the APC unit is
equipped with a system that shifts pallet B forward when loading.
The APC door on the right side of the full-enclosure shielding automatically opens and closes in
sync with pallet changing.
Positioning of pallets on this machine is performed at high precision using 2 reference pins and a
reference pad. During loading and unloading, any dust or chips are removed from the reference pad
by blowing them off with compressed air. In addition, pallet seating is checked to ensure proper
loading. If any chips, etc. are detected between the pallet and the reference pad, and alarm is
triggered.
(1) Basic specification
Pallet with tapped holes
MB-46V(E) MB-56V MB-66V
Pallet dimensions 430 mm x 1,000 mm 530 mm x 1,300 mm 630 mm x 1,530 mm
(16.93 in. x 39.37 in.) (20.87 in. x 51.18 in.) (24.80 in. x 60.24 in.)
Pallet mass 190 kg (418 lb) 325 kg (715 lb) 540 kg (1,188 lb)
Number of pallets 2 2 2
Maximum load 400 kg (880 lb) 500 kg (1,100 lb) 690 kg (1,518 lb)
Pallet with T-slots

MB-46V(E) MB-56V MB-66V
Pallet dimensions 430 mm x 1,000 mm 530 mm x 1,300 mm 630 mm x 1,530 mm
(16.93 in. x 39.37 in.) (20.87 in. x 51.18 in.) (24.80 in. x 60.24 in.)
Pallet mass 260 kg (572 lb) 445 kg (979 lb) 730 kg (1,606 lb)
Number of pallets 2 2 2
Maximum load 330 kg (726 lb) 380 kg (836 lb) 500 kg (1,100 lb)
Table 8-4
(2) Air source

Compressed air volume 500 L/min (132.1 gpm) (ANR)
Table 8-5
Secondary pressure should be kept constant at 0.5 MPa (72.6 psi) using the pressure regulator
installed at the back of the machine.
(3) Hydraulic source

Air source setting pressure 6.5 MPa (943.2 psi)
Table 8-6
6175-E P-333
SECTION 8 APC
 MB-46V(E)/56V
An APC dedicated hydraulic unit is installed at the back of the machine because APC
functions such as pallet clamp and unclamp, pallet load and unload depend on hydraulics.
 MB-66V
An APC dedicated hydraulic unit is installed at the right of the APC main unit because APC
functions such as pallet clamp and unclamp, pallet B forward and backward movement
depend on hydraulics.
8-6-3. Safety precautions
Never activate the automatic pallet changing function when a person is inside the
machine.
Failure to observe these instructions will pose immediate danger that, unless rectified, may lead
to death or serious injury.
(2) During automatic pallet changing operation, pay attention to the movement of the APC arm and
pallet, and never touch the APC.
8-6-4. APC operation panel
MANUAL INT. W. LOAD FINISHED B PALLET RUNNING

EMG. STOP
B PALLET RUN APC RESTART
O I RETRACT ADVANCE
ME12013R1201000170001
Fig. 8-13
6175-E P-334
SECTION 8 APC
8-7. Two-pallet parallel APC operation sequence
8-7-1. Pallet changing operation sequence

(1) Operating Conditions
a. Ensure that the front door of the machine's full-enclosure shielding and the 2 doors on the
APC main unit are firmly closed.
(When these doors are open, the interlock will prevent APC operation.)
c. Another pallet is set on the APC. (Note that pallet changing operation always requires two
pallets.)
d. The pallet on the APC is positioned at the correct position (change position) with the
positioning device.
e. The W. LOAD FINISHED push button switch should be pressed.
(2) NC command
M60 Pallet exchange command
Table 8-7
(3) Operation Sequence

No.
1 APC setup
2 Positioning at the APC position (HP3)
3 APC door open
4 Pallet unclamped
5 Pallet is unloaded (pallet A)
7 Pallet is loaded (pallet B)
8 Pallet clamped
9 APC door close
Table 8-8
The above cycle describes the sequence whereby workpiece on pallet A is completed and
unloaded, then a new workpiece on pallet B is loaded on the table.
6175-E P-335
SECTION 8 APC
The opposite cycle whereby the change takes place on the machine table from pallet B to pallet
A is described below.
No.
10 APC setup
12 APC door open
13 Pallet unclamped
14 Pallet is unloaded (pallet B)
16 Pallet is loaded (pallet A)
17 Pallet clamped
18 APC door close
Table 8-9
On this APC, to make pallet B setup operation easier on the APC unit, the APC shifts pallet B
forward when loading.
APC operation after sequence number 18
→ Pallet B receiver up
→ Pallet B receiver forward
→ Pallet B receiver down
Table 8-10
(Refer to [SECTION 8, 8-7-2. APC operation sequence diagram] (2) 7) through 9).)
The above is the shifting operation of pallet B after the workpiece on pallet B is completed and
unloaded.
This operation starts after the APC door closes and at the same time machining starts on the
workpiece on pallet A.
When setup of the new workpiece is ready on pallet B, by pressing the W. LOAD FINISHED
push button switch, pallet B moves to APC ready position (back side) through the following
sequence.
W. LOAD FINISHED
ME12013R1201000180001
Fig. 8-14
W. LOAD FINISHED → Pallet B receiver up

→ Pallet B receiver backup
Table 8-11
(Refer to [SECTION 8, 8-7-2. APC operation sequence diagram] (2) 10) through 12).)
6175-E P-336
SECTION 8 APC
position.
From here, to move pallet B to the setup position (front side), on the APC operation panel, set
the B PALLET RUN, ADVANCE/RETRACT switch to ADVANCE and press the push button
switch.
MANUAL INT. B PALLET RUNNING
B PALLET RUN
O I RETRACT ADVANCE
ME12013R1201000180002
Fig. 8-15
B PALLET RUN, ADVANCE → Pallet B receiver up

→ Pallet B receiver forward
Table 8-12
Then, on the APC operation panel, set the B PALLET RUN, ADVANCE/RETRACT switch to
RETRACT and press the push button switch, or press the W. LOAD FINISHED push button
switch to have pallet B moved to the APC ready position (back side).
W. LOAD FINISHED B PALLET RUNNING
B PALLET RUN
RETRACT ADVANCE
ME12013R1201000180003
Fig. 8-16
B PALLET RUN, RETRACT, → Pallet B receiver up

or W. LOAD FINISHED → Pallet B receiver backup
Table 8-13
To switch the automatic open/close of the APC door on the right side of the full-enclosure
shielding to manual open/close, go to the NC operation panel MODE SELECT and set to MDI
mode and operate by the following NC commands.
M32 APC door close
M33 APC door open
Table 8-14
The APC sequence number is displayed on the NC operation panel screen.
Also, during the APC cycle, air is blown over the reference pad of the pallet clamp system in
sync with the clamping and unclamping of pallets. Seating is checked by a pressure switch
using this air blow to prevent accidental deterioration of pallet positioning precision due to chips
getting caught between the top surface of the reference pad and the seating surface of pallets.
6175-E P-337
SECTION 8 APC
8-7-2. APC operation sequence diagram

(1) Pallet A to pallet B changing operation on machine table (APC movement during change from A
to B)
1) Sequence number
002…Table moves
003…APC door opens
(002)
A Pallet B
Change setup complete
(003)
ME12013R1201000190001
Fig. 8-17
2) Sequence number
004…Pallet unclamped
ME12013R1201000190002
Fig. 8-18
6175-E P-338
SECTION 8 APC
3) Sequence number
005…Pallet unloaded
ME12013R1201000190003
Fig. 8-19
4) Sequence number
006…Table moves
ME12013R1201000190004
Fig. 8-20
6175-E P-339
SECTION 8 APC
5) Sequence number
007…Pallet loaded
ME12013R1201000190005
Fig. 8-21
6) Sequence number
008…Pallet clamped
009…APC door closes
(008) (009)
Pallet A
Workpiece setup
ME12013R1201000190006
Fig. 8-22
6175-E P-340
SECTION 8 APC
(2) Pallet B to pallet A change operation on machine table (APC movement during change B to A)
1) Sequence number
011…Table moves
012…APC door opens
B
(011)
(012)
Pallet A
Workpiece setup
complete
ME12013R1201000190007
Fig. 8-23
2) Sequence number
013…Pallet unclamped
ME12013R1201000190008
Fig. 8-24
6175-E P-341
SECTION 8 APC
3) Sequence number
014…Pallet unloaded
ME12013R1201000190009
Fig. 8-25
4) Sequence number
015…Table moves
ME12013R1201000190010
Fig. 8-26
6175-E P-342
SECTION 8 APC
5) Sequence number
016…Pallet loaded
ME12013R1201000190011
Fig. 8-27
6) Sequence number
017…Pallet clamped
018…APC door closes
ME12013R1201000190012
Fig. 8-28
6175-E P-343
SECTION 8 APC
7) Pallet receiver up
(During cutting)
ME12013R1201000190013
Fig. 8-29
8) Pallet receiver forward
(During cutting)
ME12013R1201000190014
Fig. 8-30
6175-E P-344
SECTION 8 APC
9) Pallet receiver down
A
(During cutting)
Pallet B
Workpiece setup
ME12013R1201000190015
Fig. 8-31
10) Pallet receiver up
A
(During cutting)
Pallet B
Workpiece setup complete
ME12013R1201000190016
Fig. 8-32
6175-E P-345
SECTION 8 APC
11) Pallet receiver forward
(During cutting)
ME12013R1201000190017
Fig. 8-33
12) Pallet receiver down
A
Pallet B
(During cutting) Change setup complete
ME12013R1201000190018
Fig. 8-34
NOTE: 7) to 12) have no sequence number.

6175-E P-346
SECTION 8 APC
8-8. Continuous operation of the two-pallet parallel APC
8-8-1. Initial conditions for continuous APC operation

(1) Ensure that the front door of the machine's full-enclosure shielding and the 2 doors on the APC
main unit are firmly closed.
(When these doors are open, the interlock will prevent APC operation.)
(2) A pallet is set on the machine.
(3) Another pallet is set on the APC. (Note that pallet changing operation always requires two
pallets.)
It is necessary to use two pallets even when only one workpiece is being machined.
(4) The pallet on the APC is positioned at the correct position (change position) with the positioning
device.
(5) The W. LOAD FINISHED push button switch should be pressed.

By pressing the W. LOAD FINISHED push button switch after attaching the new workpiece to a
pallet, the lamp on the switch is lit and the next APC change command is enabled.
This button is provided to ensure safety of the operator by preventing pallet change cycle start
while work setting up is being carried out.
position.
MANUAL INT. W. LOAD FINISHED
O I
ME12013R1201000200001
Fig. 8-35
ME12013R1201000200002
Fig. 8-36
After the above, pressing the CYCLE START button will cause the M60 command to start a
change sequence as described in [SECTION 8, 8-3. Two-pallet rotary APC operation
sequence].
The CYCLE START button is also available on the APC operation panel.
6175-E P-347
SECTION 8 APC
8-8-2. Emergency stop of APC continuous operation
1) If, due to interference or other reasons, it is necessary to stop APC operation during an APC
sequence, use the EMG. STOP button.
The button is available on both the NC operation panel and the APC operation panel.
2) Note that the SLIDE HOLD push button switch works for axis feed only, thus is unable to stop
APC or ATC operation.
EMG. STOP
MANUAL INT. W. LOAD FINISHED B PALLET RUNNING

EMG. STOP
B PALLET RUN APC RESTART
O I RETRACT ADVANCE
ME12013R1201000210001
Fig. 8-37
6175-E P-348
SECTION 8 APC
8-9. Manual operation of the two-pallet parallel APC

In addition to continuous APC operation using AUTO or MDI, manual operation is possible using
[ATC/APC OPERATION] on the NC operation panel.
8-9-1. Safety precautions for manual APC operation

When "CYCLE RUN" is displayed on the operation panel, the "1 STEP ADVANCE", "1 STEP
RETURN", "1 CYCLE START", and "RETURN CYCLE" keys are inoperable.
Press the RESET push button switch to cancel "CYCLE RUN".
8-9-2. Other precautions related to APC (MNTKEY0460)

(2) During automatic pallet change operation, pay attention to the movement of the APC arm and
pallet, and never touch the APC.
Be especially careful to remove chips on the reference pin and reference pad as they will make
seating of the pallet impossible.
(4) Make sure compressed air supplied to the machine is at 0.5 MPa (72.6 psi) or above with a flow
rate of 500 L/min (132.1 gpm) (ANR) or more.
Pallet seating confirmation pressure should be set to 0.3 MPa (43.5 psi).
(5) When chips accumulate on the APC arm or the pallet hook, it can cause malfunction or make
pallet change impossible. When accumulation of chips is detected, stop the machine, check for
safety, and brush-off the chips.
(7) Excessive use of the workpiece wash gun on the APC unit can cause the tank below the APC
unit to overflow. Stop and wait for a while when use exceeds 2 minutes.
6175-E P-349
SECTION 8 APC
(8) MB-46V(E)/56V
A linear guide is used to guide the forward and backward movement of pallet B on the APC unit
side.
Grease the linear guide block once every 5,000 pallet changes with designated bearing
lubrication grease using the accessory grease gun.
Designated grease : THK AFJ GREASE
Grease amount : 1.8 mL [2 strokes]
ME12013R1201000240001
Fig. 8-38
(9) MB-66V
A linear guide and ball screws are used for the following drive system on the APC unit.
Grease each lubrication point once every 2,000 hours with designated bearing lubrication
grease using the accessory grease gun.
Drive systems : Linear guide and ball screw for pallet A, B transport
Linear guide for pallet B forward/backward movement
Linear guide for APC door open/close
Designated grease : THK AFJ GREASE
Grease amount : 1.8 mL [2 strokes]
ME12013R1201000240002
Fig. 8-39
6175-E P-350
SECTION 8 APC

In "1 STEP ADVANCE" and "1 STEP RETURN" operation, operation takes place one step at a time
in the same order as the APC sequence. This mode of operation is not used in normal operation, but
is necessary when checking APC operation, or after the EMG. STOP button is pressed during APC
operation and it becomes necessary to return to APC initial conditions before resuming operation.
Procedure :
2- Press MACHINE OPERATION flat key on the operation panel.
ME12013R1201000250001
Fig. 8-40
3- On the right of the screen being displayed, select APC button to display [APC OPERATION]
screen.
ME12013R1201000250002
Fig. 8-41
4- The "1 STEP ADVANCE" and "1 STEP RETURN" operation is enable with the corresponding
function keys.
6175-E P-351
SECTION 8 APC

(1) The "1 CYCLE START" key executes a sequence of pallet change operations that unloads the
pallet on the machine to the APC, then loads the pallet on the APC to the machine.
The operation is possible when "START OK" is displayed on screen.
(2) "RETURN CYCLE" starts the return cycle which returns the pallet to the machine, and is used
when the APC cycle is interrupted, for example.
ME12013R1201000260001
Fig. 8-42
6175-E P-352
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-1. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [1.5 MPa (217.7 psi)]

(separate tank type)
(For MF-46V, the standard option is a built-in coolant tank.)
9-1-1. Outline
As illustrated below, this unit allows coolant to run through the spindle center and sprays from the
drill tip, enabling efficient hole machining.
After using the through-spindle coolant, apply compressed air (cleaning air blow ON) to force out the
coolant remaining inside the piping completely. Otherwise, the remaining coolant will leak to the
spindle tapered surface causing reduced tool mounting accuracy.
Coolant Tank
(10) (11)
(12)
(13)
(1)
(2) (4) (14)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Tank capacity
84 L (22.2 gal)
(15)
(8)
(16)
(8)
ME12013R1201100010001
Fig. 9-1
6175-E P-353
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
1 Float switch for low fluid warning 9 Drain valve

2 Upper limit detection float switch 10 Coolant
3 Lower limit detection float switch 11 Retention knob with oil hole (Customer to procure)
4 Top cover 12 Spindlehead
5 Stop valve 13 Oil hole holder (Customer to procure)
6 Float switch for clogged filter warning 14 Oil hole drill (Customer to procure)
7 Trochoid pump 15 Filter element
8 Overflow tank 16 Oil level gauge
M339 Cleaning air blow ON

M09 Cleaning air blow OFF
M51 Through-spindle coolant ON
M09 Through-spindle coolant OFF
Table 9-1
Note
1) To remove the coolant remaining in the piping completely, air blow must be supplied for at least
15 seconds. Especially, before executing ATC, cleaning air blow must always be turned ON.
2) To use the through-spindle coolant, the special pull-stud bolt supplied by OKUMA must be
used. (Refer to the [Separate volume technical sheet].)
3) If non-water-soluble (oil-based) coolant is used, specified pressure and/or discharge may not
be obtained. Use water-soluble coolant for the through-spindle coolant system.
6175-E P-354
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-1-2. Circuit diagram of through-spindle coolant system
To the spindle
Check valve
Air blow ON
Check valve
Air filter
[2] Prefilter
Air source
0.75 kW (1 hp)
Unit abnormality 1.5 kW (2 hp) (OP)
[3] Float switch [3] [4]
Fluid level low
Trochoid pump M
1.5 MPa (217.7 psi)
[1] Suction pump 12 L/min (3.2 gpm)/14.4 L/min (3.8 gpm)
75 L/min (19.8 gpm)/100 L/min (50 Hz/60 Hz)
(26.4 gpm) (50 Hz/60 Hz) 24 L/min (6.3 gpm)/28.8 L/min (7.61 gpm)
Overflow (50 Hz/60 Hz) (OP)
0.18 kW (0.24 hp) 37 L (9.8 gal)
Medium pressure O.H. tank unit

Coolant tank Drain
ME12013R1201100020001
Fig. 9-2
No. Part description OKUMA part no. Maker Model number Q'ty
1 Coolant pump F0130-03-001-29 Fuji Electric VKP075A 180W (IEC) 1
2 MS filter H0032-0012-77 Yamasei MS70 embossed 4
20 µm (800 µin.)
3 Level switch E3041-592-017 Noken OLV-2A 2
4 Trochoid pump F0101-32-000-05 NOP TOP-2MY750-208HWMRVD (STD)
1
F0101-32-000-06-1 NOP TOP-2MY750-SO-208HWMRVD-A15 (IEC)
Trochoid pump F0101-33-000-02 NOP TOP-2MY1500-216HWMVD (STD)
(High flow rate: optional) 1
F0101-33-000-03 NOP TOP-2MY1500-IP-216HWMVD (IEC)
Table 9-2
6175-E P-355
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Trochoid pump (motor) three-phase squirrel cage induction motor, totally-

enclosed fan cool type, class E insulation
Model number FELQ-8T FELQ-80T (optional)

Output (kW (hp)) 0.75 (1) 1.5 (2)
Number of poles 4 4
Rating Continuous Continuous
Voltage (V) 200/200/220 200/200/220
Frequency (Hz) 50/60/60 50/60/60
Number of rotation (min ) -1 1,440/1,720/1,740 1,430/1,720/1,730
Current (A) 3.6/3.3/3.2 6.9/6.2/6.1
Table 9-3
Trochoid pump
Model number TOP-2MY750- TOP-2MY1500-

208HWMRVD 216HWMVD (optional)
50 Hz (1,500 min-1) Theoretical delivery 12.0 (3.17) 24.0 (6.34)
-1 (L/min (gpm)) 14.4 (3.8) 28.8 (7.6)
60 Hz (1,800 min )
50 Hz (1,500 min ) -1 Rated pressure 1.5 (217.6) 1.5 (217.6)
-1 (MPa (psi)) 1.5 (217.6) 1.5 (217.6)
60 Hz (1,800 min )
Motor output (kW (hp)) 0.75 (1) 1.5 (2)
Table 9-4
Coolant pump (Suction pump)
Model number VKP075A

Output (kW (hp)) 0.18 (0.24)
Rated voltage (V) 200 200/220
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Rated current (A) 0.85 1.0/1.0
Delivery (L/min (gpm)) 75 (19.8) 100 (26.4)
Total lift (m (ft.)) 3 (9)
Operating viscosity limit (Redwood second) 1,200 600
Standard piping diameter (PS) 1/2
Table 9-5
6175-E P-356
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Filter
Filtering accuracy Flow rate

MS filter 20 µm (800 µin.) 20 L/min (5.3 gpm)
Table 9-6
Do not use the filter in clean water.
Operating oil temperature: In continuous operation, the oil temperature must be in the range from 15
°C (59 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
Rotary union (At the top of spindle)
For both coolant and air-through ESX20J-7026 (RIX)

[A] A B [B]
Spindle side Clamp unit side Air
Check
Valve
5.5 (0.217) st.
Coolant
Oil-air outlet
ME12013R1201100070001
Fig. 9-3
Model number Rocky joint ESX20J-7026 (RIX)

Coolant Water-soluble coolant/air
Max. rotating speed min -1 35,000
Max. working pressure MPa (psi) 12.0 (1,741.2) (coolant) 1.0 (145.1) (air)
Max. flow rate L/min (gpm) 30 (7.9) (Coolant)
Recommended filtering accuracy µm (µin.) 25 (1,000)
Table 9-7
 For details, refer to the [PURCHASED UNIT INSTRUCTION MANUAL].
[Supplement]
The flow rate widely varies with the coolant type and viscosity.
6175-E P-357
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-1-4. Preparation for operation
Supplying coolant
Open the top cover and fill the tank with the specified fresh coolant to the upper red line on the oil
level gauge.
Turning the power ON
Make sure that unit fault warning signal is not output. If the warning signal is output, it indicates
clogging of the prefilter or that coolant is filled to the upper limit of the overflow tank.
To clean the prefilter, refer to [SECTION 9, 9-1-5. Maintenance and regular inspection].
6175-E P-358
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-1-5. Maintenance and regular inspection (MNTKEY0811)
Cleaning the tank and changing coolant
Inspection frequency: every 6 months
Prefilter (Changing filter element)
Inspection frequency: weekly or when a warning is issued
(1) (2)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(3)
ME12013R1201100110001
Fig. 9-4
6175-E P-359
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
1 Pipe arm 4 Float switch

2 Filter element 20 µm (800 µin.) 5 Overflow tank
Part number: H0032-0012-77
3 Overflow tank 6 Sediments
Drain valve
(1) Lift the cap on top of the filter to see if each chamber is filled as full as the root of the pipe.
(2) If all chambers are full of coolant, stop flowing dirty coolant into the filter and leave the filter for
one night for dehydration.
Deposited sludge will be dehydrated to a cake containing 70 % to 85 % water in approximately
8 to 24 hours.
(3) In the next morning, when the filter is dried, take the filter out of the arm and set new filter. The
opening of the removed filter should be tightened by string and the filter should be disposed or
burnt.
(4) After replacing the filter element, discharge the overflow tank by opening the drain valve.
Finally, close the valve.
[Supplement]
 Water repellency of prefilter in the initial stage of use

Prefilter has a light repellency because of its material (polypropylene unwoven cloth).
During initial use, this water-repellent characteristic may make it difficult for the coolant to pass
through the filter, resulting in a [FILTER CLOGGED] alarm. (This does not mean the filter is
defective.)
 Solution
To reduce the adverse effect of repellency, lightly pick up an edge of the prefilter filled with
coolant, and then drop it.
By giving such light impact, coolant will start flowing and thereafter a required filtering amount
can be obtained.
6175-E P-360
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Stop valve at the inlet of the prefilter

The valve should be left open during operation. Close the valve only when replacing the filter
element.
Open
Close
ME12013R1201100110002
Fig. 9-5
If chips are contained in the coolant, it will shorten pump life. Therefore, cleaning of the inside of
the tank and cleaning and changing of filter element must be carried out at regular intervals.
6175-E P-361
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-2. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [7.0 MPa (1,015.7

psi)] (separate tank type)
(For MF-46V, the standard option is a built-in coolant tank.)
9-2-1. Outline
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
ME12013R1201100120001
Fig. 9-6
1 Coolant 4 Oil hole holder (Customer to procure)

2 Retention knob with oil hole (Customer to procure) 5 Oil hole drill (Customer to procure)
3 Spindlehead
6175-E P-362
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(5)
ME12013R1201100120002
Fig. 9-7
1 Stop valve 4 Tank capacity: 150 L (39.6 gal)

2 Prefilter 5 Oil level gauge
3 Piston pump

Table 9-8
Note
6175-E P-363
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Discharge together with rotary coupler drain. To rotary coupler
Air blow ON
[12]
[11]
Coolant ON [10]
Prefilter 5 µm (200 µin.) [6] [5] 

Line filter
[2] 20 μm (800 μin.)
High-pressure pump
[13] Air 7 MPa (1,016 psi)
[2]
3/8
[4]
L R F [4] 2.2 kW (3 hp)
Air 3-piece set [2] M
[7] [8] [9] [3]

Refer to Table 9-10
Suction line filter
100 µm (4,000 µin.) Refer to Table 9-9
0.18 kW (0.24 hp)
Suction pump [1]
M
Drain
120 L (31.7 gal)
Coolant tank High pressure (7 MPa (1,016 psi)) coolant tank unit
ME12013R1201100130001
Fig. 9-8
Table 9-9
Total lift (m (ft.)) 3 (9) 3 (9)
Table 9-10
6175-E P-364
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
1 Oil pump F0130-03-001-29 Fuji Electric VKP075A 180W (IEC) 1
2 MS filter H0032-0012-75 Yamasei MS100 5 μm (200 μin.) 3
3 Suction filter H0032-0009-22 Masuda MFG. F-VLFE06-100S06T 1
4 Oil pump F0130-07-000-35-4 KISOH PK-6 50 Hz/60 Hz 14 L/min 7 MPa (1,016 psi) 2.2 kW (3 hp) 1
4’ (Adjusting handle) - - - -
5 Line filter H0032-0011-22-2 Masuda MFG. F-FPME06-20S-036-X-C 1
Filter element H0032-0011-86 Masuda MFG. A06-020SW-F
6 Pressure gauge (SI) T019-400-008-12 Yodogawa Keiki PAGT-R1/4 x 60 x 16 MPa (2,322 psi) 1
Pressure gauge (SI, psi) T019-400-008-13 Yodogawa Keiki PAGT-R1/4 x 60 x 16 MPa (2,322 psi) & PSI display 1
7 Float switch H0090-0003-10 Noken FP-1A 1
8 Level switch E3041-070-037 Willy Vogel WS32-2/340 1
9 Level switch E3041-592-019-1 Noken FS-2S L430 1
10 S solenoid valve F0001-400-005-69 CKD CVS2-15A-70-B2HS-3 1
11 S solenoid valve F0001-411-001-43 CKD AG4X9371-DC24V 1
12 Check valve F0040-982-000-82 IHARA KZU00-005E 1
13 Branch union Y H0016-0002-01 SMC KQU10-99 1
Table 9-11
6175-E P-365
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Piston pump (motor)
Model number MLA6107B

Output (kW (hp)) 2.2 (3)
Number of poles 4
Voltage (V) 200
Frequency (Hz) 50/60
Current (A) 9.2/8.5
Table 9-12
Piston pump
Model number PK-6-3(RB)

Discharging coolant amount [L/min (gpm)] 50 Hz 12.0 (3.1)
60 Hz 14.0 (3.6)
Discharging pressure [MPa (psi)] 7 (1,015)
Table 9-13
Coolant pump (Suction pump)
Model number VKP075A

Output (kW (hp)) 0.18 (0.24)
Rated voltage (V) 200 200/220
Rated current (A) 0.85 1.0/1.0
Total lift (m (ft.)) 3 (9)
Operating viscosity limit (Redwood second) 1,200 600
Standard piping diameter (PS) 1/2
Table 9-14
Filter

MS filter 5 µm (200 µin.) 10 L/min (2.6 gpm)
Table 9-15
°C (59 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
6175-E P-366
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
[A] A B [B]
Air
Spindle side Clamp unit side
Check
Valve
5.5 (0.217) st.
Coolant
Oil-air outlet
ME12013R1201100180001
Fig. 9-9

Max. rotating speed min-1 35,000
Table 9-16
[Supplement]
6175-E P-367
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Supplying coolant
level gauge.
Make sure that unit fault warning signal is not output. If the warning signal is output, it indicates
clogging of the prefilter or that coolant is filled to the upper limit of the overflow tank.
To clean the prefilter, refer to [SECTION 9, 9-2-5. Maintenance and regular inspection].
Pressure adjustment
Procedure :
1- Mount a through-spindle tool (reference of a hole at the tool tip: Φ1 (0.04) (2 places)) to the
spindle.
2- Turn the pressure regulation handle (No.4' in the circuit diagram) of the through-spindle
cooling unit counterclockwise fully until it stops.
3- Let water out executing the through-spindle coolant ON command.
4- Turn the pressure regulation handle (No.4' in the circuit diagram) of through-spindle cooling
unit clockwise until the pressure gauge indicates 7 MPa (1,016 psi).
[Supplement]
Do not adjust the pressure higher than 7 MPa (1,016 psi).

Coolant discharge varies depending on the size of the tool hole diameter and the type (viscosity)
of the coolant.
Also a sufficient pressure may not be obtained depending on the tool hole diameter.
6175-E P-368
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-2-5. Maintenance and regular inspection
Prefilter (Changing filter element)

(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
ME12013R1201100230001
Fig. 9-10
1 Float switch 4 Sediments

2 Pipe arm 5 Overflow tank
3 Filter 5 µm (200 µin.) 6 Overflow tank
Part number: H0032-0012-75 Drain valve
(1) Lift the cap on top of the filter to see if each chamber is filled as full as the root of the pipe.
(2) If all chambers are full of coolant, stop flowing dirty coolant into the filter and leave the filter for
one night for dehydration.
Deposited sludge will be dehydrated to a cake containing 70 % to 85 % water in approximately
8 to 24 hours.
(3) In the next morning, when the filter is dried, take the filter out of the arm and set new filter. The
opening of the removed filter should be tightened by string and the filter should be disposed or
burnt.
(4) After replacing the filter element, discharge the overflow tank by opening the drain valve.
Finally, close the valve.
6175-E P-369
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Stop valve at the inlet of the prefilter

The valve should be left open during operation. Close the valve only when replacing the filter
element.
Open
Close
ME12013R1201100230002
Fig. 9-11
Replacing the seals in the piston pump for 7.0 MPa (1,015.7 psi) through-
spindle coolant system
Seals inside the pump have a limited life. Refer to the [KISOH PK-6 PUMP UNIT INSTRUCTION
MANUAL]. Replace the life-expired seals according to [O ring packing exchange procedure manual]
in the [PURCHASED UNIT INSTRUCTION MANUAL].
6175-E P-370
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-3. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [1.5 MPa (217.7 psi)]

(integrated into coolant tank type) (MF-46V only)
9-3-1. Outline
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
ME12013R1201100250001
Fig. 9-12

3 Spindlehead

Table 9-17
Note
When using an HSK tool, use a holder with a coolant supply pipe. (Refer to the [Separate
volume technical sheet].)
6175-E P-371
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
To the rotary union
Check valve
Check valve
Air blow ON
[2]
25 µm (1,000 µin.)
3-way valve
[2] 25 µm (1,000 µin.)

Air filter
1.5 MPa (217.7 psi)
Air source pressure 12 L/min (3.2 gpm)/14.4 L/min (3.8 gpm) [1] 0.75 kW (1 hp)
(50 Hz/60 Hz) M 1.5 kW (2 hp) (OP)
24 L/min (6.3 gpm)/28.8 L/min (7.61 gpm)
(50 Hz/60 Hz) (OP)
Drum filter 30 μm (1,200 μin.) Strainer 150 μm (6,000 μin.)
Coolant tank
ME12013R1201100260001
Fig. 9-13
1 Trochoid pump F0101-32-000-04 NOP TOP-2MY750-208HWM-VD 1
With VD-type relief valve (Japan)
F0101-32-000-12 NOP TOP-2MY750-208HWM-VD-15 1
IEC compliant (overseas)
Trochoid pump F0101-33-000-02 NOP TOP-2MY1500-216HWMVD 1
(High flow rate: optional) (Japan)
F0101-33-000-03 NOP TOP-2MY1500-IP-216HWMVD 1
IEC compliant (overseas)
2 Line filter H0032-0010-32 Masuda MFG. F-APLE04-25S 2
Table 9-18
6175-E P-372
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Trochoid pump (motor) three-phase squirrel cage induction motor, totally-

Model number FELQ-8T FELQ-80T (optional)

Output (kW (hp)) 0.75 (1) 1.5 (2)
Number of poles 4 4
Rating Continuous Continuous
Voltage (V) 200/200/220 200/200/220
Frequency (Hz) 50/60/60 50/60/60
Number of rotation (min ) -1 1,440/1,720/1,740 1,430/1,720/1,730
Current (A) 3.6/3.3/3.2 6.9/6.2/6.1
Table 9-19
Trochoid pump
Model number TOP-2MY750-208HWM TOP-2MY1500-

216HWMVD (optional)
50 Hz (1,500 min-1) Theoretical delivery 12.0 (3.17) 24.0 (6.34)
(L/min (gpm)) 14.4 (3.8) 28.8 (7.6)
60 Hz (1,800 min-1)
50 Hz (1,500 min ) -1 Rated pressure 1.5 (217.6) 1.5 (217.6)
-1 (MPa (psi)) 1.5 (217.6) 1.5 (217.6)
60 Hz (1,800 min )
Motor output (kW (hp)) 0.75 (1) 1.5 (2)
Table 9-20
Filter

Line filter 25 µm (1,000 µin.) 15 L/min (4 gpm)
Table 9-21
°C (59 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
6175-E P-373
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
[A] A B [B]
Air
Check
Valve
5.5 (0.217) st.
Coolant
Oil-air outlet
ME12013R1201100300001
Fig. 9-14

Max. rotating speed min -1 35,000
Table 9-22
[Supplement]
6175-E P-374
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Supplying coolant
level gauge.
Make sure that a line filter warning is not issued in this state. If a warning is issued, the line filter is
clogged. Refer to the section on [SECTION 9, 9-3-5. Maintenance and regular inspection] below.
Line filter (Changing the element)
(1) The clog alarm is triggered when there is a 0.26 MPa (37.73 psi) pressure differential.
(2) If the alarm is triggered, manually switch the 3-way ball valve and resume machining.
(3) The element can be removed by opening the top cover of the filter and pulling it out from the
top. Wash or replace it.
For details on replacement procedures,

refer to the [APL-03 to 24 Type Line Filter Instruction Manual] supplied separately.
6175-E P-375
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-4. Through-spindle coolant supply unit [7.0 MPa (1,015.7

psi)] (integrated into coolant tank type) (MF-46V only)
9-4-1. Outline
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
ME12013R1201100350001
Fig. 9-15

3 Spindlehead

Table 9-23
Note
When using an HSK tool, use a holder with a coolant supply pipe. (Refer to the [Separate
volume technical sheet].)
6175-E P-376
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
To the rotary union
Check valve
Check valve
Air blow ON
[2]
20 µm (800 µin.)
3-way valve
[2] 20 µm (800 µin.)

Air filter
[1]
3.7 kW (5 hp)
7.0 MPa (1,015.7 psi)
Air source pressure 12.2 L/min (3.22 gpm)/17 L/min (4.5 gpm) (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Drum filter 30 μm (1,200 μin.) Strainer 150 μm (6,000 μin.)
Coolant tank
ME12013R1201100360001
Fig. 9-16
1 Coolant pump F0130-08-000-23 Sumitomo Precision CQTM33-16-3.7-2R-S1243-C 1
Products Co., Ltd. F-SPRT-03-70-13 (relief valve)
(Japan)
F0130-08-000-32 Sumitomo Precision CQTM33-16V-3.7-3-T-S1273-D 1
Products Co., Ltd. F-SPRT-03-70-13 (relief valve)
(overseas)
2 Line filter H0032-0010-88 Masuda MFG. F-HLME04-20S04T-1-100P 2
Table 9-24
6175-E P-377
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Coolant pump (motor) three-phase squirrel cage induction motor, totally-

Model number CQTM33-16

Output (kW (hp)) 3.7 (4.93)
Number of poles 4
Rating Continuous
Voltage (V) 200/200/220
Frequency (Hz) 50/60/60
Current (A) 14.5/14.0/12.9
Table 9-25
Coolant pump
Model number CQTM33

50 Hz (1,500 min ) -1 Discharging coolant amount 11.4 (3.01)
(L/min (gpm)) 17.0 (4.49)
60 Hz (1,800 min-1)
50 Hz (1,500 min ) -1 Discharging pressure 6.9 (1,001.2)
-1 (MPa (psi)) 6.4 (928.6)
60 Hz (1,800 min )
Table 9-26
Filter

Line filter 20 µm (800 µin.) 20 L/min (5.3 gpm)
Table 9-27
°C (59 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
6175-E P-378
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
[A] A B [B]
Air
Check valve
5.5 (0.217) st.
Coolant
Oil-air outlet
ME12013R1201100400001
Fig. 9-17

Max. rotating speed min-1 35,000
Table 9-28
[Supplement]
6175-E P-379
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Supplying coolant
level gauge.
Make sure that a line filter warning is not issued in this state. If a warning is issued, the line filter is
clogged. Refer to the section on [SECTION 9, 9-4-5. Maintenance and regular inspection] below.
Line filter (Changing the element)
(1) The clog alarm is triggered when there is a 0.18 MPa (26.12 psi) pressure differential.
(2) If the alarm is triggered, manually switch the 3-way ball valve and resume machining.
(3) The element can be removed by opening the top cover of the filter and pulling it out from the
top. Wash or replace it.
For details on replacement procedures,

For details, refer to the [HLM-04 to 12 Type Line Filter Instruction Manual].
6175-E P-380
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
9-4-6. Procedure to change through pin in the pulling shaft (MNTKEY0220)
Drawbar through pin replacement procedure (No.40)
1) The through pin incorporated in the through-spindle tool pulling shaft is a consumable part.
Replace the through pin every 10 months of machine operation (or when ATC operation cycle
reaches 180,000 times, whichever is shorter) according to the procedure described below. If
the wear develops in the seal attached on the bottom end of the through pin, water will leak,
causing a problem.
2) The seal life varies, depending on machining kind and coolant type.
If water leakage is observed before the above specified part change time (or the number of
ATC times) is reached, immediately stop using the through-spindle and replace the through
pin.
3) Wear safety gears such as safety boots, helmet, and protective goggle to change through
pins.
4) Secure sufficient floor space and take safe positions for the through pin changes.
For other precautions, make sure you read the [SECTION 1 SAFETY GUIDE] in advance.
Part number for through pin
Specifications OKUMA part no.

No.40 spindle JIS/DIN U9800-0614-013-01
CAT U9800-0614-014-01
Table 9-29
 Installation preparation
(1)
(2)
(3)
ME12013R1201100450001
Fig. 9-18
1 Front side 3 Cap

2 Bolts to remove
M5 x2
6175-E P-381
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
 Installation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
ME12013R1201100450002
Fig. 9-19
1 Align the drive key position with the stopper keyhole. 5 Stopper
2 Spindle drive keyhole 6 Collet guide lock bolts
M4X16L x4
3 Stopper securing bolt 7 Attached spanner
M5X16L x2
4 Collet guide 8 Attached lever
Install the [collet guide] on the [stopper], then install it onto the spindle.
 Installation completed
(1)
ME12013R1201100450003
Fig. 9-20
1 Preparation for removal of drawbar through pin is complete.

6175-E P-382
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
 Cross-section of spindle
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(9)
(10)
ME12013R1201100450004
Fig. 9-21
1 Coil spring 7 Collet guide

2 Collar 8 Cap
3 Pulling shaft 9 Attached lever
4 Through pin 10 Attached spanner
5 Ring 11 Stopper
6 Collet
6175-E P-383
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Procedure :
1- Set the spindle to RELEASE.
2- Remove two M5 bolts on the spindle end face [cap].
3- Turn the spindle with hand to the position where the spindle drive key aligns with the drive
keyhole on the [stopper].
Note
Verify that "spindle indexing" has not been executed.
4- Mount the [collet guide] to the [stopper] and then mount it to the spindle end face.
Use M4X8L bolts to mount the [collet guide]. Tighten them only halfway so that it is easier to
align the stopper with spindle center.
Use M5X16L bolts to mount the [stopper].
5- Set the spindle to the state where it is not clamping the tool and insert [attached spanner].
6- Using the [attached spanner] and [attached lever], remove the [pulling shaft] unit.
[Collet], [ring], [through pin], [coil spring], and [collar] will come off along with the [pulling
shaft].
7- Remove the [coil spring] and [through pin] from the [pulling shaft].
8- Then, install a new [through pin] in the [pulling shaft].

Grease the new [through pin] and the O-ring mounted in the [through pin]. Next, mount the
[coil spring] and apply grease to the O-ring section incorporated in to the outer regions of the
[pulling shaft] as well as the entire [pulling shaft.]
9- Mount the assembled [pulling shaft] and [collar] in the spindle.

Use only the [attached spanner] and [attached lever] to fully tighten. Do not tighten the
[attached lever] excessively by inserting a pipe or the like in the lever. Failure to follow the
instruction may damage the spindle. Take an extra caution not to damage the O-rings when
mounting them.
10- After verifying that the [pulling shaft] is tightened enough, remove the [stopper].
After removing the [stopper], install the 2 M5 bolts removed from the [cap] of the spindle side.
11- Mount a through spindle tool and run the coolant to verify that no coolant leakage occurs
inside the spindle.
The procedure above completes the [through pin] replacement.

6175-E P-384
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
Drawbar through pin replacement procedure (No.50)
1) The through pin incorporated in the through-spindle tool pulling shaft is a consumable part.
Replace the through pin every 10 months of machine operation (or when ATC operation cycle
reaches 180,000 times, whichever is shorter) according to the procedure described below. If
the wear develops in the seal attached on the bottom end of the through pin, water will leak,
causing a problem.
2) The seal life varies, depending on machining kind and coolant type.
If water leakage is observed before the above specified part change time (or the number of
ATC times) is reached, immediately stop using the through-spindle and replace the through
pin.
3) Wear safety gears such as safety boots, helmet, and protective goggle to change through
pins.
4) Secure sufficient floor space and take safe positions for the through pin changes.
For other precautions, make sure you read the [SECTION 1 SAFETY GUIDE] in advance.
Part numbers for through pins and O-rings (for No.50 spindle taper only)
Specifications Part number for through pin

No.50 spindle MAS/JIS/DIN/CAT (1) U9800-0616-017-01
Table 9-30
1 Including optional CAT specifications
Model number Part number for O-ring alone

O-ring (2) S15 JIS4 Type D F109-0004-88
Table 9-31
2 The part number, U9800-0616-017-01 for through pins comes with S15 O-ring
6175-E P-385
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
 Installation preparation
(1)
(2)
(3)
ME12013R1201100460001
Fig. 9-22
1 Front side 3 Cap

2 Bolts to remove
M4 x3
6175-E P-386
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
 Installation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(8)
ME12013R1201100460002
Fig. 9-23
1 Align the drive key position with the stopper keyhole. 5 Collet guide
2 Spindle drive keyhole 6 Collet guide lock bolts
M5X12L x2
3 Stopper securing bolt 7 Attached spanner
M4X25L x2
4 Stopper 8 Attached lever
Install the [collet guide] on the [stopper], then install it onto the spindle.
6175-E P-387
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
 Installation completed
(1)
ME12013R1201100460003
Fig. 9-24
1 Preparation for removal of drawbar through pin is complete.

6175-E P-388
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
 Cross-section of spindle
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7) Through pin
(8)
(10)
(9)
(11)
ME12013R1201100460004
Fig. 9-25
1 Collar 7 Collet
2 O-ring (S15) 8 Stopper
3 Coil spring 9 Attached spanner
4 Pulling shaft 10 Cap
5 Ring 11 Attached lever
6 Through pin
6175-E P-389
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
 Cross-section of pulling shaft
(1)
ME12013R1201100460005
Fig. 9-26
1 O-ring (S15)
Procedure :
1- Set the spindle to RELEASE.
2- Remove three M4 bolts on the spindle end face [cap].
3- Turn the spindle with hand to the position where the spindle drive key aligns with the drive
keyhole on the [stopper].
Note
Verify that "spindle indexing" has not been executed.
4- Mount the [collet guide] to the [stopper] and then mount it to the spindle end face.
Use M5X12L bolts to mount the [collet guide]. Tighten them only halfway so that it is easier to
align the [stopper] with spindle center.
Use M4X25L bolts to mount the stopper.
5- Set the spindle to the state where it is not clamping the tool and insert [attached spanner].
6- Using the [attached spanner] and [attached lever], remove the [pulling shaft] unit.
[Collet], [ring], [through pin], [coil spring], and [collar] will come off along with the [pulling
shaft].
6175-E P-390
SECTION 9 OPTIONS
7- Remove the [coil spring] and [through pin] from the [pulling shaft].
Before removing the [through pin], remove the [O-ring (S15)] that is assembled inside the
[pulling shaft]. When doing so, use a stick with a thin tip.
The [through pin] would not come off unless the [O-ring (S15)] is removed.
8- Then, install a new [through pin] in the [pulling shaft].

Grease the new [through pin] and the O-ring mounted in the [through pin].
After mounting the [through pin], mount the [O-ring (S15)].
Choose a soft stick without sharp edge to mount the [O-ring (S15)]. Do not use finger since
the inside of the pulling shaft has threads and may cut the finger if inserted.
After the [O-ring (S15)] mounting is done, apply grease to the [O-ring (S15)] area.
Next, mount the [coil spring] and apply grease to the O-ring section incorporated in to the
outer regions of the [pulling shaft] as well as the entire [pulling shaft].
9- Mount the assembled [pulling shaft] and [collar] in the spindle.

Use only the [attached spanner] and [attached lever] to fully tighten. Do not tighten the
[attached lever] excessively by inserting a pipe or the like in the lever. Failure to follow the
instruction may damage the spindle. Take an extra caution not to damage the O-rings when
mounting them.
10- After verifying that the [pulling shaft] is tightened enough, remove the [stopper].
After removing the [stopper], install the three M4 bolts removed from the [cap] of the spindle
side.
11- Mount a through spindle tool and run the coolant to verify that no coolant leakage occurs
inside the spindle.
The procedure above completes the [through pin] replacement.

6175-E P-391
SECTION 10 PRESERVATION
SECTION 10 PRESERVATION
10-1. Preservation during transportation and storage

The machine can be damaged permanently by corrosion. Rust removal and cleaning are extremely
expensive and time consuming. The machine should therefore be protected against corrosion when
shut down for long periods (storage) or during transportation.
The machine is prepared and protected in the following manner by OKUMA for transportation ex.
works.
10-2. Cleaning before preservation

The clamping surface, jig, spindle tube, telescopic covers, guide rails and other machined surfaces
are particularly sensitive to corrosion. These parts should be cleaned well prior to preserving.
Ensure that coolant lines and hoses are blown out carefully so as to prevent any subsequent
emergence of residual coolant.
10-3. Truck transportation and warehouse storage

Machines transported by truck are treated with preservative oil (if transportation and any necessary
intermediate storage does not take longer than 4 weeks). For the preservative oil, any oil-based
product that is suitable for the purpose can be used. Ensure that all exposed polished and burnished
parts and surfaces of the machine are absolutely clean. Residual coolant must be removed with
particular care, as oil cannot infiltrate this and it forms stains after a short period of time. Oil must be
applied twice, the second application should be 15 to 20 minutes after the first one.
10-4. Removing preservation

The preservation must be removed using any commercially available machine cleaning concentrate
in a solution ratio of 10:1.
10-5. Machine transportation

All NC axes of the machine have to be fixed with the transportation fixtures before moving or lifting
the machine.
6175-E P-392
SECTION 11 DISPOSAL OF THE MACHINE
SECTION 11 DISPOSAL OF THE MACHINE

When disposing of this machine, comply with municipal disposal ordinances and regulations concerning
environmental compatibility, health hazards, and disposal.
For detailed information, check with your local municipality.
11-1. Material groups

Separate metals, non-metals, composite materials and auxiliary materials by material type and
dispose of them in an environmentally friendly manner.
11-2. Operating materials

All operating materials must be disposed of in compliance with applicable waste disposal
regulations.
11-3. Disposal of electronic components

Electronic components (primary parts, drive systems, wires, etc.) are to be disposed of properly as
electronic scrap.
11-4. Disposal of the packaging

The packaging and packing material used by OKUMA do not contain any problematic substances.
They are all recyclable with the exception of wood materials, and should be fundamentally disposed
of in the recycling bin. Wood should be disposed of in compliance with local ordinances.
6175-E
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
Publication No. Date Edition
6175-E December 2012 1st
6175-E-R1 August 2013 2nd
6175-E-R2 October 2013 3rd
6175-E-R3 February 2014 4th
6175-E-R4 July 2014 5th
6175-E-R5 June 2015 6th
6175-E-R6 December 2015 7th
6175-E-R7 May 2016 8th
6175-E-R8 August 2016 9th
6175-E-R9 January 2017 10th
6175-E-R10 March 2017 11th
6175-E-R11 October 2017 12th
Original Instruction Manual

This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or
design changes.
Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.
If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual,
please contact your OKUMA representative.

ME12 013 R12a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ME12 013 R12a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ME12 013 R12a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vertical machining center

SECTION 2 OUTLINE .............................................................................................15

SECTION 3 TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION....................................................56

SECTION 4 PREPARATION FOR OPERATION.....................................................85

4-6-1. Specifications .................................................................................................. 142

5-10-1. Chip conveyor (Chip flushing system)............................................................. 194

SECTION 6 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS ....................207

6-10-6. Using the Bando tension meter ....................................................................... 244

SECTION 8 APC ...................................................................................................320

8-1-2. Specifications .................................................................................................. 320

SECTION 9 OPTIONS ..........................................................................................352

9-2-4. Preparation for operation................................................................................. 367

SECTION 10 PRESERVATION ...............................................................................391

SECTION 11 DISPOSAL OF THE MACHINE.........................................................392

SECTION 1 SAFETY GUIDE

1-1. General advice

The machine may only be operated by trained and authorized personnel.

1-2. Basic security advice

1-2-1. Warning signals and symbols

Danger due to suspended loads

Danger due to toppling of the machine

Danger of being cut

Danger due to laser beams

Danger due to electrical voltage

Danger due to strong magnetic fields

Danger due to crushing zone

Danger due to protruding tools

Personal protective equipment

No access for persons with pacemakers

No access for persons with metallic implants

No open flames or heat sources

Do not extinguish with water

1-2-2. Electric system

1-2-3. Strong magnetic fields

1-2-4. Pneumatic, hydraulic and coolant system

1-2-5. Laser radiation

1-3. Personal security

1-4. Intended use

1-5. Improper use

 machining any flammable material

 machining composite (fiber) and resin materials

 machining carbon material

 machining magnesium material

 Use of oil-based coolants

 water protection areas

 danger of life and limb

 damage to the machine

 damage to other property

1-6. What to do in case of emergency

1-6-1. Emergency stop

 if persons are in danger.

 if there is a danger of the machine or the workpiece being damaged.

Emergency Measures in Door-close and Power-OFF State

1-6-2. Fire protection

What to do if there is a fire

(2) Switch off the machine:

 Press the EMG. STOP button.

 Shut off the main breaker in the control box.

1-7. General advice for the user